Icom Training Manual

Large Systems
iCOM Microprocessor
Precision Cooling Training Manual

TM-10098: Rev. 08/22/2013 (software ver. PA2)
iCOM Control Training Manual
iCOM
Training Manual
DS – VS Units
CW Units
Challenger 3000 Units
1
iCOM Controls Training Manual
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitations of

Liabilities
Liebert Corporation has taken every precaution to ensure the accuracy and
completeness of the information in this manual. Liebert Corporation makes no
expressed or implied warranty of any kind with regard to the information in this
manual. Liebert Corporation assumes no responsibility, and disclaims all liability
for incidental or consequential damages or other loss resulting from the use of this
information or from errors or omissions in the information. Liebert Corporation
may make improvements and / or changes in the product(s) described in this
manual at any time. Information in this manual is subject to change at any time
and Liebert Corporation does not have a duty to update this information.
Liebert® and the Liebert logo are registered trademarks of Liebert Corporation.
Emerson®, Emerson Network Power and the Emerson logo are registered
trademarks of Emerson Electric Co.
Copyright © 2006 by Liebert Corporation
All rights reserved throughout the world.

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Printed in the United States of America
2
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Temperature and Humidity Control 6
Temperature Control Programs 7
Temperature Control Operations 8
Challenger3000 Units: Single Compressor Cooling 9
Challenger3000 Units: Single Digital Scroll Compressor Cooling 11
DS / VS Units: 2 Stage Compressor Cooling 13
DS / VS Units: Optional 4 Stage Compressor Cooling 15
DS / VS Units: Optional 2 Compressor Digital Scroll Operation 20
Chilled Water Cooling 22
Optional Glycool (Econ-O-Cycle) Cooling – Anti-freeze Solution 25
Optional Dual Source Cooling – Chilled Water 26
Optional Staged Electric Reheat 27
Optional Hot Water / Steam Reheat 31
Temperature Sensor Types 32
Temperature Compensation 34
Humidity Control Programs 35
Predictive Humidity Control 35
Relative Humidity Control 37
Compensated Humidity Control 37
Dew Point Humidity Control 38
Humidity Control Operations 39
Water Level Control with Infrared Humidifier 41
Dehumidification Operation 43
1 Stage Compressor Dehumidification Operation 43
2 Stage Compressor Dehumidification Operation 45
Compressor Dehumidification and Electric Reheat Operation 47
Chilled Water Dehumidification Operation 48
Fan Control Operation 50
Additional Programs 52
Next Maintenance Calculation 63
Networking and Communications 65
Teamwork Operation 65
Unit Lead / Lag Function 68
Preparations for Networking 70
iCOM Network Setup Process 72
3
Networking Units with Small Displays 74

Networking units with Large Displays 75
Sample Multiple Unit Network Setup Table 76
Chapter 2: Programming Functions 79

iCOM Display and Keypad Descriptions 81
iCOM Display Symbols and Icons 83
Status Display Screen Examples 84
Menu Screens and Icons 87
Where and When to Save 89
Passwords 89
User Menu Icons and Parameters 90
Service Menu Icons and Parameters 100
Advanced Menu Icons and Parameters 146
Chapter 3: Electrical Connections and Hardware 165

Display Assemblies – Plug Connections 166
Display DIP Switch and Jumper Settings 167
Control Board Plug Connections 169
Control Board DIP Switch and Jumper Settings 182
Fuse Board Connections 184
Return Temperature - Humidity Assembly Plug Connections 186
Return Temperature - Humidity Assembly DIP Switch and Jumper Settings 187
Optional Supply Air Temperature Sensor 188
Optional 2T - Temperature Assembly DIP Switch and Jumper Settings 189
Optional Ground Current Detect Board Plug Connections – Electric Reheat 190
Chapter 4: General Data 192

Isolation 193
Unit Control Board: Opto-Isolator - Triac Legends 194
Control Input Check (Aquastat Sensor) 199
Diagnostics - Service Mode 200
Moisture Content Charts 201
Transducer Information 218
Digital Scroll High Temperature NTC Sensor Chart 219
Basic Psychrometric Notes 220
Unit Configuration Code Definitions 222
4
Chapter 5: MicroChannel Condenser 229

Troubleshooting
MC Condenser Control Board Plug Connections 230
MC Condenser Control Board: Opto-Isolator - Triac Legends 234
Outdoor CANbus Connections, DIP Switch and Jumpers Settings 235
Accessing the MC Condenser Menu Screens 236
MC Condenser Software Updating Procedure 245
Manual Fan Motor Configuration for the MC Condenser 247
Manual Fan Motor Operational Test for the MC Condenser 249
Chapter 6: Miscellaneous Information 251

Model Number Nomenclature 252
Refrigerant Charge and Pipe Sizing Tables 256
Copper Pipe Fittings Equivalent Lengths 260
Glycol Solution Concentration Mixtures Table 260
Fluid Volume in Standard Type L Copper Piping 261
Liebert MC Condenser Charging Instructions 263
Temperature - Pressure Table 271
How To Use The Schematic 273
Electrical Schematic List 274
5
Chapter 1
Temperature and Humidity Control
 Temperature Control Programs
 Temperature Control Operations
 Challenger3000 Units
 DS / VS Units
 Chilled Water Units
 Optional Glycool and Dual Cool Units
 Optional Electric and Hot Water Reheat
 Temperature Control Sensor Types
 Temperature Compensation
 Humidity Control Programs
 Humidity Control Operations
 Fan Control Operation
 Additional Programs
 Next Maintenance Calculation
 Networking and Communications
6
Temperature and Humidity Control Programs

This section provides details on how your Liebert iCOM control responds to the
user programmed input values and room conditions. Refer to this section when
you need specific information on the various control operations. This section
provides details on the user selectable temperature control programs, user
selectable temperature sensor control options and the user selectable humidity
control programs.
Cooling and / or Heating Required, in Percent (%)

The temperature control programs for the iCOM microprocessor are based on a
calculated percent (%) requirement for cooling and / or heating. This percent (%)
requirement is determined by the control type (algorithm) selected by the user.
Temperature Control Programs

The three (3) user selectable temperature control program’s are:
1. P – Proportional
2. PI - Proportional + Integral (factory default program)
3. Intelligent
Proportional (P) Control

Proportional control is base on room temperature change only. The cooling
requirement increases as the sensed temperature increases above the
programmed temperature set point. The temperature being maintained increases
as the load increases. At full load the room would be controlled at a temperature
equal to the temperature set point plus ½ of the temperature proportional band.
Proportional + Integral (PI) Control

The PI control combines two (2) individual terms to determine the control output
for a given set of conditions.
The proportional (P) term is determined by the difference between the current
temperature and the control set point. This term is expressed in % cooling
(heating) desired for each degree above (below) the set point. It is adjustable from
0% to 100% per degree. The purpose of this term is to adjust the control output
for any deviation between the current room temperature and the control set point.
The integral (I) term is determined by two things: the difference between the return
air temperature and control set point and the amount of time this difference has
existed. This term is expressed in % cooling (heating) desired for each minute
and degree above (below) the set point. It is adjustable from 0% - 100% per
degree/minute. The purpose of this term is to force the control to maintain the
temperature around the set point by slowly but continuously adding (subtracting) a
7
small amount of cooling (heating) to the total control output until the temperature is
at the set point.
Intelligent Control
The Intelligent Control operates from a set of general rules that define how the
control output should be adjusted for different system conditions. The rules are
designed to duplicate the actions that an experienced human operator would take
if manually controlling the system.
Basically, this is done in a three-function process that differs from earlier

mathematical defined strict type data, hence, fuzzy logic. The on or off, true or
untrue type of statement is not used. The consideration now is how to set the
input value into a membership set, qualify this membership with rules and then
decides on the output consequence for action. It is not really that simple, but it is
basically how it works.
Temperature Control Operation

The iCOM cooling / heating temperature control band is defined by four (4)
parameters that are user selectable:
1. Temperature Set Point

2. Temperature Proportional Band
3. Temperature Dead Band
4. Heater Dead Band
The temperature proportional band is equally divided above and below the
temperature set point for unit operation as follows:
 Temperature Set Point plus ½ Temperature Proportional Band = Full Cooling

 Temperature Set Point minus ½ Temperature Proportional Band = Full Heat
The separate temperature and heater dead bands, if used, will shift the cooling
and / or heating on / off operations away from the temperature set point. The
temperature cooling dead band value (factory default set at 2F) means cooling
stops when the temperature being sensed by the control decreases to the
temperature set point plus the temperature dead band value.
If the Liebert unit is supplied with an optional heating device, the heater dead band
value (factory default set at 0F) means heating stops when the temperature
sensed by the control increases to the temperature set point.
Cooling / Heating Operation

Proportional temperature control is used to illustrate the following cooling and
heating examples.
8
Challenger3000 Units
The Challenger3000 unit is supplied with one (1) compressor cooling circuit. The
compressor circuit is rated at the unit total cooling capacity. The Challenger3000
can be supplied with either of the following compressor types:
 single scroll type compressor that operates in an on / off configuration
 single digital scroll type compressor that will operate in a timed loaded /
unloaded configuration
Both configurations are described in the following pages.
Single Scroll Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

The cooling control band is established at the temperature set point with the length
equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
The control activates the compressor when the air temperature increases to 100%
of the cooling control band. The control deactivates the compressor when the air
temperature decreases to the temperature set point.
In the following example the control band begins at 70F, the temperature set point
and has a length of 4F, which is ½ of the programmed temperature proportional
band value.
1 Stage Compressor Cooling – No Dead Band
TSP + ½ TPB = Full Cooling
Compressor
ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
Compressor
OFF
Temperature Set Point 70F

Temperature Proportional Band 8F
As the air temperature increases, the compressor is activated at 74F which is

100% of the cooling control band. When the air temperature decreases to 70F
which is 0% of the cooling control band, the compressor is deactivated.
9
Single Scroll Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

equal to the programmed temperature dead band value plus ½ of the programmed
temperature proportional band value.
The control activates the compressor when the air temperature increases to the
programmed temperature dead band value plus 100% of the cooling control band.
The control deactivates the compressor when the when the air temperature
decreases to the temperature set point plus the programmed temperature dead
band value.
and has a length of 5.0F, which is ½ of the programmed temperature dead band
value plus ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
1 Stage Compressor Cooling with Dead Band
TSP + TDB + 1/2 TPB = Full Cooling
Temperature
Dead Band Compressor
ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
Compressor
OFF

Temperature Dead Band 1F
As the air temperature increases, the compressor is activated at 75F or the

temperature dead band value plus 100% of the cooling control band. When the air
temperature decreases to 71F, the temperature set point plus the dead band
value the compressor is deactivated.
Remember the temperature dead band value is used by the control to shift the
cooling on / off operations away from the temperature set point.
10
Single Digital Scroll Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

When activated, the single digital scroll type compressor will operate in a timed
loaded / unloaded configuration to cool the space.
During the loaded state the digital scroll valve (DSV1) is de-energized (closed) and
the compressor operates like a standard scroll and delivers full capacity. During
the unloaded state the digital scroll valve is energized (opened) and the scroll
plates are separated so there is no refrigerant flow (cooling capacity) through the
compressor.
Capacity modulation is achieved by energizing / de-energizing the Digital Scroll

Valve (DSV1). Therefore, the cooling capacity achieved is the timed average
capacity which is variable from 10 – 100%.
Example: If the digital scroll compressor has a 15 second cycle (factory default
value) and the solenoid is de-energized (closed or loaded) for 10 seconds and
then energized (open or unloaded) for 5 seconds the resulting cooling capacity will
be 66%. The factory default Digital Scroll Cycle time is programmed at 15
seconds.
Example
Solenoid Compressor is pumping at 66% capacity

Closed
Compressor
Loaded
Solenoid
5 Sec 10 Sec 5 Sec 10 Sec 5 Sec 10 Sec
Open
Compressor
Unloaded 15 sec cycle 15 sec cycle 15 sec cycle
Note: The digital scroll compressor lwill run continuously while the scroll
plate is raised and lowered as the cooling requirement varies from 10% to
100% of the compressor capacity.
Digital Scroll PWM Cooling Control

In the following example we define the digital scroll compressor start and stop for
total cooling capacity and how the compressor loads and unloads with the PWM
(Pulse Width Modulation – based on time in seconds) as determined by the
control based on the programmed temperature set point and proportional band
value.
When the control calculates a 25% cooling demand, the compressor is activated
and operates at 50% capacity for ½ of the timed cycle. The cooling stage is
deactivated when the calculated cooling demand decreases to 10% of the cooling
band.
11
Single Digital Scroll PWM Cooling Control

PWM %
100% (15 sec)
90% (13.5 sec)
80% (12 sec)
70% (10.5 sec)
60% (9 sec)
50% (7.5 sec)
40% (6 sec) On start - Compressor
runs 50% capacity
30% (4.5 sec)
20% (3 sec)
Cooling call activated 25%
10% (1.5 sec) compressor capacity
0% (0 sec)
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Cooling Control %
The following flow chart offers a brief sequence of operation for the digital scroll
compressor in order to establish an acceptable evaporator pressure.
When the demand for cooling reaches 25% of the control band,
the digital scroll compressor starts at 50% of its capacity.
Water / Glycol Units Air Cooled Units
Compressor operates at 50% Compressor operates at 50% capacity

capacity for 1 minute - Low for 2.5 minutes than 100% capacity for
Pressure Alarm Delay value 30 seconds - Low Pressure Alarm
Delay value
Suction pressure should now be high enough to satisfy the Low

Pressure Phase 1 Threshold, the default threshold is 50 psig for
Air Cooled Units and 75 psig for Water / Glycol Cooled Units.
Yes No
Compressor operates Low Pressure Management
at desired capacity. rules will safely turn the
compressor off.
12
DS / VS Units
The Liebert DS / VS units are supplied with two (2) separate compressor cooling
circuits. Each compressor circuit is rated at ½ of the unit total cooling capacity.
These units can be supplied with any of the following compressor types:
 scroll type compressors that operate in an on / off configuration
 semi-hermetic type compressor with unloaders that operate in an on / off
configuration
 digital scroll type compressors that operate in a timed loaded / unloaded
configuration
The various configurations are described in the following pages.
2 - Stage Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
The control activates the 1st cooling stage when the air temperature increases to
50% of the cooling control band and the 2nd cooling stage activates at 100% of the
cooling control band.
The control deactivates the 2nd stage of cooling when the air temperature
decreases to the temperature set point value plus 50% of the cooling control band
value. The 1st cooling stage is deactivated when the air temperature decreases to
the temperature set point value.
band value.
1st Stage - Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

Compressor ON Compressor ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
1st stage -Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

Compressor OFF Compressor OFF

13
As the air temperature increases, the 1st cooling stage is activated at 72F which is
50% of the cooling control band. If the air temperature continues to increase, the
2nd cooling stage will activate at 74F which is 100% of the cooling control band.
When the air temperature decreases to 72F or 50% of the cooling control band
the 2nd cooling stage is deactivated. The 1st cooling stage is deactivated at the
temperature set point of 70F.
2 - Stage Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

equal to the programmed temperature dead band value plus ½ of the programmed
The control activates the 1st cooling stage when the air temperature increases to
the programmed temperature dead band value plus 50% of the cooling control
band. The 2nd cooling stage is activated when the air temperature increases to the
programmed temperature dead band value plus 100% of the cooling control band.
The control deactivates the 2nd stage of cooling when the air temperature
decreases to the programmed temperature dead band value plus 50% of the
cooling proportional control band value. The 1st cooling stage is deactivated when
the air temperature decreases to the programmed temperature set point plus the
dead band value.
In the following example the control band begins at 70F, temperature set point
and has a length of 5F, which is the programmed temperature dead band value
plus ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
TSP + TDB +(½ TPB = Full Cooling

2nd Stage - Lag
Temperature 1st Stage - Lead Compressor ON
Dead Band Compressor ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
1st Stage - Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

Compressor OFF Compressor OFF

14
As the air temperature increases the 1st cooling stage is activated at 73F or the
programmed dead band value plus 50% of the cooling control band. If the air
temperature continues to increase, the 2nd cooling stage will activate at 75F or the
programmed dead band value plus 100% of the cooling control band.
When the air temperature decreases, the 2nd cooling stage is deactivated at 73F
or the programmed dead band value plus 50% of the cooling control band and the
1st cooling stage is deactivated at 71F or the programmed temperature set point
plus the dead band value.
4 – Stage Compressor Cooling with Unloaders

Liebert DS / VS units can be supplied with two (2) semi-hermetic type
compressors each supplied with an electrically controlled suction cut-off cylinder
unloader valve. The electrical solenoid valve is used to unload or reduce the
cooling capacity of the compressor. The compressors will operate in an on / off –
loaded / unloaded configuration method to cool the space. The hot gas bypass
option is not available on 4-stage cooling units.
4 – Stage Compressor Cooling with Unloaders – No Dead Band

The basic temperature cooling control band is established at the temperature set
point with the length equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band
value.
Stage Activation on Temperature Increase

The control activates the 1st cooling stage (lead compressor unloaded) when the
air temperature increases to 33% of the cooling proportional band. The 2nd cooling
stage (lag compressor unloaded) is activated when the air temperature increases
to 63% of the cooling proportional band.
The control activates the 3rd cooling stage (lead compressor now loaded) by de-
energizing (closing) the unloader when the air temperature increases to 80% of
the cooling proportional band. The control activates the 4th cooling stage (lag
compressor now loaded) by de-energizing (closing) the unloader when the air
temperature increases to 100% of the cooling proportional band.
Stage Deactivation on Temperature Decrease

The control deactivates the 4th cooling stage (lag compressor is unloaded by
energizing / opening the unloader) when the air temperature decreases to 90% of
the cooling proportional control band value. The control deactivates the 3rd cooling
stage (unloading the lead compressor by energizing / opening the unloader) when
the air temperature decreases to 70% of the cooling proportional control band
value.
15
The control deactivates the 2nd cooling stage by turning off the unloaded lag
compressor when the air temperature decreases to 47% of the cooling
proportional control band value. The control deactivates the 1st cooling stage by
turning off the unloaded lead compressor when the air temperature the return air
temperature decreases to the temperature set point value plus 17% of the cooling
control band value.
The table below shows the sequence of device operation for each of the four (4)
cooling stages.
STAGE COMPRESSORS and UNLOADER STATE
Compressor 1 On, Unloader On (energized / open, reduced capacity)

1st
Compressor 2 Off, Unloader Off (de-energized or closed)
2nd
Compressor 1 On, Unloader Off (de-energized / closed, full capacity)
3rd
4th
The table below is based on a temperature set point of 70F with a control band
length of 4F, which is ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
The temperatures displayed are approximate values as calculated by the
microprocessor control.
STAGE TEMPERATURE - NO DB
1st Stage ON Set Point + 1.3F = 71.3F

2nd Stage ON Set Point + 2.5F = 72.5F
3rd Stage ON Set Point + 3.2F = 73.2F
4th Stage ON Set Point + 4.0F = 74.0F
4th Stage OFF Set Point + 3.6F = 73.6F
3rd Stage OFF Set Point + 2.8F = 72.8F
2nd Stage OFF Set Point + 1.9F = 71.9F
1st Stage OFF Set Point + 0.7F = 70.7F
16
The following example is based on a temperature set point of 70F with a control
band length of 4F, which is ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band
value.
1st Stage - Lead

Compressor ON
2nd Stage - Lag
Unloader ON
Compressor ON
Unloader ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
3rd Stage - Lead 4th Stage - Lag

Unloader OFF Unloader OFF

4th Stage - Lag

3rd Stage - Lead
Compressor ON
Compressor ON
Unloader ON
Unloader ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
2nd Stage - Lag

Compressor OFF
Unloader OFF
1st Stage - Lead

Compressor OFF
Unloader OFF
17
As the air temperature increases the 1st cooling stage (lead compressor unloaded)
is activated at 71.3F which is 33% of the cooling control band. If the air
temperature continues to increase the 2nd cooling stage (lag compressor
unloaded) will activate at 72.5F which is 63% of the cooling control band. If the
return temperature continues to increase the 3rd cooling stage (lead compressor
loaded) is activated at 73.2F which is 80% of the cooling control band. If the air
temperature continues to increase the 4th cooling stage (lag compressor loaded)
will activate at 74.0F which is 100% of the cooling control band.
When the air temperature decreases, the 4th cooling stage is deactivated at 73.6F
or 90% of the cooling control band, the 3rd cooling stage will be deactivated at
72.8F or 70% of the cooling control band. The 2nd cooling stage will be
deactivated at 72.8F or 47% of the cooling control band and the 1st cooling stage
is deactivated at 70.7F or 17% of the cooling control band.
4 – Stage Compressor Cooling with Unloaders with Dead Band

The table below is based on a temperature set point of 70F with a control band
length of 5F, which is the programmed temperature dead band value of 1F plus
½ of programmed temperature proportional band value. The temperatures
displayed are approximate values as calculated by the microprocessor control.
STAGE TEMPERATURE w/ DB
1st Stage ON Set Point + 2.3F = 72.3F

2nd Stage ON Set Point + 3.5F = 73.5F
3rd Stage ON Set Point + 4.2F = 74.2F
4th Stage ON Set Point + 5.0F = 75.0F
4th Stage OFF Set Point + 4.6F = 74.6F
3rd Stage OFF Set Point + 3.8F = 73.8F
2nd Stage OFF Set Point + 2.9F = 72.9F
1st Stage OFF Set Point + 1.7F = 71.7F
18
In the following example the control band begins at the 70F temperature set point
TSP + TDB + ½ TPB = Full Cooling
Temperature 1st Stage - Lead

Dead Band Compressor ON
Unloader ON
2nd Stage - Lag
Compressor ON
Unloader ON
70 71 72 73 74 75
3rd Stage - Lead 4th Stage - Lead

Unloader OFF Unloader OFF

3rd Stage -Lead 4th Stage - Lag

Temperature Unloader ON
Unloader ON
Dead Band
70 71 72 73 74 75
2nd Stage - Lag

Compressor OFF
Unloader OFF
1st Stage - Lead

Compressor OFF
Unloader OFF
19
As the air temperature increases the 1st cooling stage (lead compressor unloaded)
is activated at 72.3F or the dead band value plus 33% of the cooling control band.
If the air temperature continues to increase the 2nd cooling stage (lag compressor
unloaded) will activate at 73.5F or the dead band value plus 63% of the cooling
control band. If the air temperature continues to increase the 3rd cooling stage
(lead compressor loaded) is activated at 74.27F or the dead band value plus 80%
of the cooling control band. If the air temperature continues to increase the 4th
cooling stage (lag compressor loaded) will activate at 75.0F or the dead band
value plus 100% of the cooling control band.
When the air temperature starts to decrease, the 4th cooling stage is deactivated at
74.6F or the dead band value plus 90% of the cooling control band. As the air
temperature continues to decrease, the 3rd cooling stage will be deactivated at
73.8F or the dead band value plus 70% of the cooling control band. If the air
temperature continues to decrease, the 2nd cooling stage will be deactivate at
72.9F or the dead band value plus 47% of the cooling control band and the 1st
cooling stage is deactivated at 71.7F or the dead band value plus 17% of the
cooling control band.
2 Compressor Digital Scroll Operation – No Dead Band

equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value divided by the
number of cooling stages.
The optional Digital Scroll compressors operate in two stages, the “loaded state”
and the “unloaded state”. During the loaded state the solenoid valve is de-
energized (closed) and the compressor operates like a standard scroll and
delivering full capacity. During the unloaded state the solenoid valve is energized
(opened) and the scroll plates are separated so there is no capacity through the
compressor.
Capacity modulation is achieved by energizing and de-energizing the solenoid

valve. Therefore, the cooling capacity achieved is the time average capacity
which is a variable from 10 – 100%. Example: If you have a 15 second cycle and
the solenoid is de-energized for 10 seconds, and then energized for 5 seconds,
the resulting capacity will be 66%. The factory default Digital Scroll Cycle time is
programmed at 15 seconds.
When the control calculates a 25% cooling demand, the 1st cooling stage (lead
compressor) is activated. If the control calculates a cooling demand of 35%, the
2nd cooling stage (lag compressor) is activated.
The control deactivates the 2nd stage of cooling (lag compressor) when the
calculated cooling demand decreases to 20%. The 1st cooling stage (lead
20
compressor) is deactivated when the calculated cooling demand decreases to

10%.
In the following example we define the Digital Compressor start and stop for
sensible cooling capacity and how the compressors load and unload with the
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation – based on time in seconds) as determined by the
control based on the programmed temperature set point and proportional band
values.
Note: The Digital Scroll will run continuously while the scroll plate is raised and
lowered as the cooling requirement varies from 10% to 100% of the compressor
capacity.
Digital Scroll PWM Cooling Control
21
Chilled Water Cooling – No Dead Band

The Challenger3000 and DS / VS units are supplied with a standard actuator
controlled chilled water valve stepping from 0% to 100% open to regulate the fluid
flow to the cooling coil . The cooling control band is established at the
temperature set point with the length equal to ½ of the programmed temperature
proportional band. The control valve travel is proportional within the cooling
control band.
The control begins to activate (open) the chilled water valve when the sensed air
temperature increases to 10% of the cooling control band through 100% travel
when the sensed temperature increases to 100% of the cooling control band. As
the cooling demand decreases the control will close the valve until fully closed
when the sensed temperature decreases to the temperature set point value or 0%
of the cooling control band value.
The actuator valve motor is driven open / closed by a 24 VAC signal from the
control with the actual valve position based on the programmed valve travel time.
Triac switch Q17 (open) or Triac switch Q18 (close) are used to operate the valve,
only one triac switch can be operated at a time. The 24 VAC signal can be
checked at plug P22 on the control board.
In the fallowing example the control band begins at the 70F temperature set point
band value.
Chilled Water Cooling – No Dead Band
CW Valve
100% Open
70 71 72 73 74 75
CW Valve
0% open

As the air temperature increases, the chilled water valve is activated at 70.4F
which is 10% of the cooling control band. The valve will be 50% open at 72.0F air
temperature and 100% open at 74.0F air temperature.
22
When the air temperature decreases the control will close the valve until fully
closed when the air temperature decreases to the temperature set point value.
The time required by the control to drive the actuator valve full open or full closed
is determined by the unit configuration code.
Chilled Water Cooling with Dead Band

In the following example the control band begins at the 70F temperature set point
TSP + TDB + ½ TPB = Full Cooling
Temperature
Dead Band CW Valve
100% Open
70 71 72 73 74 75
CW Valve
0% Open

As the air temperature increases, the chilled water valve is activated at 71.4F or
the dead band value plus 10% of the cooling control band. The valve will be 50%
open at 73.0F air temperature and 100% open at 75.0F air temperature. When
the air temperature decreases the control will close the valve until fully closed
when the air temperature decreases to 71.0F or the programmed temperature set
point plus the dead band value.
The time required by the control to drive the actuator valve full open or full closed
is determined by the unit configuration code.
23
Chilled Water Feedback Valve Control

Whenever the unit control is changed from return sensor to supply sensor the
chilled water actuator control must reconfigured to enable feedback signal control.
Only a qualified service technician should perform the following procedure.
1. The feedback signal on the control valves uses Analog Input #1 for operation.
There must be no connection to plug P11 pins 1 – 4, if anything is connected
to P11 and cannot be removed the feedback signal control cannot be used.
2. The technician must set DIP switch SW2 switch 1 to the ON and switch #2 to
the OFF positions.
3. The jumpers on P68 must be repositioned or added to jumper the two pins on
left side together and the two pins on the right together, the two pins in middle
are not to be jumped.
4. Go to the Service Menu screen and select the Service icon and enter the
service level password 5010.
5. Scroll down to menu line S379 “Valve control”, select Feedback and press
the enter key to put the control in auto calibration.
6. During auto calibration function menu line S380 readout will change to “Yes”
and menu line S381 readout will change to “Ongoing”. When menu line S381
displays the word “Idle” the auto calibration process is complete.
24
Optional Glycool (Econ-O-Cycle) Cooling – Anti-freeze Solution

When supplied with the Glycool option, the basic unit is supplied with an additional
coil, piping, fluid flow control valve and an Aquastat Sensor (AQ) which measures
the glycol fluid temperature. The sensor is mounted to the unit glycol supply fluid
line and serves as the control interface in determining the system operation.
Selection between the glycool or compressor operation is controlled by the
microprocessor using this aquastat to sense the glycol temperature.
The Glycool Cooling program establishes two distinct control bands for cooling
control operation. The first band controls the operation of the chilled glycol valve
and the second controls the operation of the compressors, 2 stages, 4 stages or
digital scroll.
The microprocessor checks the return air temperature and the entering glycol fluid
temperature to determine a cooling capacity. In order to reduce compressor
cycling and to prevent chilled glycol valve hunting, Glycool cooling capacity does
not become available until the entering chilled glycol fluid temperature is at least
8F below the air temperature or 3F lower than the air temperature for two (2)
consecutive hours.
When the microprocessor decides that the return glycol fluid temperature is cold
enough the first cooling band is the modulating valve control. A second band is
added to the first band for the compressors to operate in the normal 1 stage, 2
stage, 4 stage or digital scroll control method. If the chilled glycol fluid
temperature is not cold enough the valve control band is replaced by the
compressor band. If the chilled glycol cooling capacity is reduced by a rise in the
glycol fluid temperature, the control band shrinks proportionally. This allows the
compressor band to move down as well. The following examples show the
Glycool operation at 100% capacity.
25
Glycool at 100% Capacity with 2 Stage Cooling - No Dead Band
Glycool Lead
Valve 100% Compressor
Open ON
Lag
Compressor
ON
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Glycool Lag
Valve 0% Compressor
Open OFF
Lead
Compressor
OFF
Glycool at 50% Capacity with 2 Stage Cooling - No Dead Band
Optional Dual Source Cooling – Chilled Water

When Liebert units are supplied with the Dual Cooling option, the basic unit is
supplied with an additional coil, piping, fluid flow control valve and an Aquastat
Sensor (AQ) which measures the chilled water fluid temperature. The sensor is
mounted to the unit chilled water supply fluid line and serves as the control
interface in determining the system operation. Selection between chilled water or
compressor operation is controlled by the microprocessor using this aquastat to
sense the chilled water temperature.
The Dual Source Cooling program establishes two distinct control bands for
cooling control operation in the same method as Glycool. The first band controls
the operation of the chilled water valve and the second controls the operation of
the compressors, either 1 stage, 2 stage, 4 stage or digital scroll.
The microprocessor checks the air temperature and the entering chilled water fluid
temperature to determine a cooling capacity. The chilled water cooling capacity is
considered to be 100% if the entering Chilled Water fluid temperature is 8F lower
than the air temperature.
When the microprocessor decides that the return chilled water temperature is cold
enough the first cooling band is the modulating valve control. A second band is
26
added to the first band for the compressors as in the normal 1 stage, 2 stage, 4
stage or digital scroll control method. If the chilled water temperature is not cold
enough the valve control band is replaced by the compressor band.
Dual Cooling at 100% Capacity with 2 Stage Cooling - No Dead Band
Glycool Lead
Valve 100% Compressor
Open ON
Lag
Compressor
ON
70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
Glycool Lag Compressor

Valve 0% OFF
Open
Lead Compressor
OFF
An addition program called Minimum Chilled Water Temperature is available with

the Dual Cooling option. This program allows the end user to select a Minimum
Chilled Water Temperature set point that will not permit simultaneous operation of
the chilled water valve and compressors. When the supply chilled water
temperature decreases to the programmed value, the chilled water valve control is
operational and the compressors are NOT permitted to operate. If the chilled
water temperature increases 2°F above the set point, then the compressors are
permitted to operate again if needed.
Optional Staged Electric Heat

Liebert Challenger3000 units can be supplied with an optional two (2) stage
electric heat assembly. The two (2) stages (elements) will operate in an on / off
configuration to heat the unit discharge air as it enters the space.
Liebert DS / VS units can be supplied with an optional three (3) stage electric heat
assembly. The three (3) stages (elements) will operate in an on / off configuration
to reheat the unit discharge air as it enters the space.
3 Stage Electric Heat – No Dead Band

The basic temperature heating control band is established at the temperature set
point with the length equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band
27
value divided by the number of heating stages. We are using a three (3) stage
electric heat in out examples.
The control activates the 1st electric heat stage when the air temperature
decreases to 33% of the heating proportional band. The 2nd electric heat stage
activates when the air temperature decreases to 66% of the heating proportional
band. The 3rd electric heat stage activates when the air temperature decreases to
100% of the heating proportional band.
The control deactivates the 3rd heat stage when the air temperature increases to
66% of the heating proportional control band value. The 2nd heat is deactivated
when the air temperature increases to 33% of the heating proportional control
band value. The 1st heat stage is deactivated when the air temperature increases
to the temperature set point value.
In the following example that the control band begins at the 70F temperature set
point minus ½ of the programmed temperature proportional band value.
3 Stage Electric Heat – No Dead Band
TSP - ½ TPB = Full Heat
3rd Heat 2nd Heat 1st Heat

Stage ON Stage ON Stage ON
65 66 67 68 69 70
3rd Heat
2nd Heat
Stage 1st Heat
Stage
OFF Stage
OFF
OFF
As the air temperature decreases the 1st heat stage is activated at 68.7F or 33%
of the heating control band. If the air temperature continues to decrease the 2nd
heat stage is activated at 67.4F or 66% of the heating control band. If the air
temperature continues to decrease the 3rd heat stage is activated at 66.0F or
100% of the heating control band.
When the air temperature starts to increase, the 3rd heat stage is deactivated at
67.4F or 66% of the heating control band. The 2nd heat stage is deactivated at
68.7F or 33% of the heating control band and the 1st heat stage is deactivated at
70.0F temperature set point.
28
3 Stage Electric Heat with Dead Band

The basic temperature heating control band is established at the temperature set
point with the length equal to the programmed heater dead band value plus ½ of
the programmed temperature proportional band value divided by the number of
heating stages. We are using a three (3) stage electric heat in out examples.
The control activates the 1st electric heat stage when the air temperature
decreases to the heater dead band value plus 33% of the heating proportional
band. The 2nd electric heat stage activates when the air temperature decreases to
the heater dead band value plus 66% of the heating proportional band. The 3rd
electric heat stage activates when the air temperature decreases to the heater
dead band value plus 100% of the heating proportional band value.
The control deactivates the 3rd heat stage when the air temperature increases to of
the heater dead band value plus 66% of the heating proportional control band
value. The 2nd heat is deactivated when the air temperature increases to the
heater dead band value plus 33% of the heating proportional control band value.
The 1st heat stage is deactivated when the air temperature increases to the
temperature set point value minus the heater dead band value plus 0% of the
heating proportional control band value.
In the following example that the control band begins at the 70F temperature set
point minus the programmed heater dead band value plus ½ of the programmed
3 Stage Electric Heat with Dead Band
TSP - HDB - ½ TPB = Full Heat
3rd Heat 2nd Heat 1st Heat

Stage On Stage On Stage On Heater
Dead Band
66 65 66 67 68 69 70
3rd Heat
2nd Heat
Stage 1st Heat
Stage
OFF Stage
OFF
OFF
Heater Dead Band 1F
Remember the heater dead band value is used by the control to shift the heating
on / off operations away from the temperature set point.
29
During normal operation, whenever a call for heat is initiated, the microprocessor
control will rotate the electrical heat elements.
Heat Call Operating Sequence

1st Call Stage 1, Stage 2 and Stage 3
2nd Call Stage 2, Stage 3 and Stage 1
3rd Call Stage 3, Stage 1 and Stage 2
4th Call Stage 1, Stage 2 and Stage 3
30
Optional Hot Water / Steam Heat – No Dead Band

Liebert units can be supplied with an optional hot water / steam heat assembly to
heat the unit discharge air as it enters the space. When Liebert units are supplied
with this option the basic unit is supplied with an additional coil, piping, fluid flow
control valve. Liebert uses a modulating type motor to drive the valve open /
closed for flow control. The heating control band is established at the temperature
set point with the length equal to ½ of the programmed temperature proportional
band. The control valve travels within the heating control band.
The control begins to activate (open) the heating valve when the air temperature
decreases to 33% of the heating control band. When the air temperature
decreases to 66% of the heating band the valve is 50% open. When the air
temperature decreases to 100% of the heating band the valve is 100% open.
As the temperature increases the control will close the valve until fully closed when
the air temperature increases to the temperature set point value or 0% of the
heating control band value.
The modulating valve motor is powered by a 24 VAC signal but is positioned by a

variable DC voltage signal, both signals come from the control. Both voltage
signals can be checked at plug P51 on the control board.
band value.
Hot Water / Steam Heat – No Dead Band
Heating Heating
Valve Valve
100% 0%
Open Open
65 66 67 68 69 70

As the air temperature decreases, the heating valve is activated at 68.6F which is
33% of the heating control band. The valve will be 50% open at 67.3F air
When the air temperature increases the control will close the valve until fully
closed when the air temperature increases to the temperature set point value.
31
Optional Hot Water / Steam Heat with Dead Band

plus ½ of the programmed proportional band value.
Hot Water / Steam Heat with Dead Band
Heating
Valve Heater
100% Dead Band
Open
66 65 66 67 68 69 70
Heating
Temperature Set Point 70F Valve 0%
Heater Dead Band 1F Open
As the air temperature decreases, the heating valve is activated at 67.6F which is
33% of the heating control band. The valve will be 50% open at 66.3F air
When the air temperature increases the control will close the valve until fully
closed when the air temperature increases 69F or the programmed dead band
value plus 0% of the cooling control band value.
Remember the heater dead band value is used by the control to shift the heating
on / off operations away from the temperature set point.
Temperature Sensor Types

The iCOM control can use a combination of temperature sensor assemblies to
manage the system operation. The choices are:
1. Return Temperature – Humidity sensor assembly (factory standard)

2. Supply Air Temperature sensor (optional, must be ordered)
3. Remote 2T Temperature sensor assembly (optional, must be ordered)
32
Return Temperature – Humidity sensor assembly: located in the unit return air
and used to control the unit temperature and humidity operations and associated
alarms.
Supply Temperature sensor (optional): sensor is located in the discharge air of

the unit it is connected to. This sensor can be programmed for:
Supply Control: controls the amount of cooling / heating needed to maintain

discharge conditions within the programmed values
Supply Limit: used with chilled water units only to maintain a minimum
discharge air temperature
Cooling Only: used to modulate the cooling capacity of the unit based on the
supply (discharge) air temperature
Disable: displays the discharge air temperature only, not used for control
Remote 2T Temperature sensor assemblies (optional): each 2T assembly

consists of two temperature sensors that are field installed to monitor the rack inlet
air temperature. A maximum of 10 remote 2T temperature assemblies can be
connected to a single unit. The sensor(s) can be programmed for:
Disabled: does not display any temperature values and is ignored for unit
operation
Reference: displays as a read only value and does not affect the unit operation
Control: displays the sensed temperature values and can be used to affect
cooling based on:
Sensor level: applied when connected to a single unit. Control can be

programmed to use the average temperature of the two probes or use the
highest temperature probe for control response.
Unit level: applied when connected to a single unit. The control can be
programmed to use the highest temperature of a single sensor probe or the
average temperature of any number of sensor probes for control response.
Regardless of how many sensor probes are being averaged for control all
connected sensors are being monitored by the iCOM control. This allows for
control flexibility as the rack loads change.
System level: same as the unit level except applied when networked into a
group of units. The control can be programmed to use the highest average
temperature of any number of sensor probes for control response. Regardless
of how many sensor probes are being averaged for control all connected
sensors are being monitored by the iCOM control. This allows for control
flexibility as the rack loads change.
33
Factory Programmed Default Values and Ranges
Temperature Set Point Default Adjustment Range

73F 41 - 104F by 1F
Return or Remote Sensor
(23.0C) (5.0 - 40.0C by .1C)
66F 41 - 104F by 1F
Supply Sensor
(18.9C) (5.0 - 40.0C by .1C)
Temperature Proportional Band Default Adjustment Range
12F 4 - 200F by 1F
Return Sensor
(6.7K) (2.0 - 111.0K by .1K)
16F 4 - 200F by 1F
Supply or Remote Sensor
(8.9K) (2.0 - 111.0C by .1K)
Temperature Dead Band Default Adjustment Range
2F 0 - 36F by 1F
Cooling
(1.1K) (0.0 - 20.0K by .1K)
0F 0 - 36F by 1F
Heater
(0.0K) (0.0 - 20.0K by .1K)
Temperature Compensation:
Supply compensation: optional program can be used to link the cold aisle
temperature to the unit cooling capacity and unit airflow. This programs requires
either a supply temperature sensor or remote 2T sensors be installed. When the
unit airflow is at 100% the control will automatically lower the supply temperature
set point to provide the proper cooling requirement. The supply temperature
compensation band value is programmed by the end user. As the cooling
requirement decreases the control will re-adjust the unit airflow and cooling
capacity to meet the new demand.
Return compensation: optional program can be used to ensure the return

temperature is keep above a specific programmed value. This program can be
used with either a supply temperature sensor or remote 2T sensors. When the
return air temperature decreases to the program value the control will
automatically increase the temperature set point to provide the proper return
temperature requirement. The return temperature compensation band value is
programmed by the end user. As the return temperature increases the control will
re-adjust the unit airflow and cooling capacity to meet the new demand.
34
Humidity Control
Humidification and/or Dehumidification in Percent (%)
The humidity control program for the iCOM microprocessor is based on a
calculated percent (%RH) requirement for humidification and / or dehumidification.
This percent (%RH) requirement is determined by the control type (algorithm)
selected by the user. The Liebert DS / VS Chilled Water and Challenger3000
units provide humidification control using the optional infrared or Steam
Generating humidifier and dehumidification control by staging the compressors or
chilled water valve to 100% of their capacity.
Humidity Control Programs

The four (4) user selectable humidity control programs are:
1. Predictive: based on grains of moisture in the air (factory default)
2. Relative Humidity (%RH)
3. Compensated
4. Dew Point
Predictive Humidity Control – Factory Default Setting
Predictive humidity control is based on the moisture content in the air. The iCOM
control automatically adjusts the actual sensed humidity reading as the sensed air
temperature deviates from the programmed temperature set point before it is sent
to the microprocessor control for interpretation. The control then converts the
temperature and humidity values to a moisture content value defined as either
grains per cubic foot or grains per pound. This recalculated content value is
compared to the content control band to determine operation. The content band is
determined by the:
 Programmed temperature set point
 Programmed humidity set point in %RH
 Programmed humidity proportional band in %RH
 Programmed humidity dead band in %RH
This automatic humidity sensor reading adjustment results in a predictive humidity

control response. Predictive humidity control automatically adjusts the
display readout by 3% RH for each 2ºF (1.1ºC) degree difference between the
return air temperature and the temperature set point. The adjustment is
directly proportional.
35
Predictive Humidity Control Flowchart
It is important to remember that the unit displays relative humidity %RH not the
actual moisture content value. The moisture content (grains) values are used only
in the internal control program for control operation. Example: if the temperature
set point is 70F (21.1ºC) and the sensed air temperature is 72F (22.2ºC) the
humidity will display a reading 6% higher than the actual value. The adjusted
humidity reading in %RH is shown on the status display screen.
The predictive humidity program can be analyzed by using the Moisture Content
Charts located further back in this manual. The control automatically recalculates
the high and low humidity alarm trip points internally for the changes in room
conditions.
Note: Remember that when viewing the display humidity graphs or calibrating
the humidity sensors the values are shown in real %RH humidity reading.
36
Relative Humidity Control

Relative humidity control is based on the humidity content in the air. The iCOM
microprocessor control determines the unit humidification / dehumidification
operation by comparing the sensed humidity value to the control band that is
determined by the:
Compensated Humidity Control

Compensated humidity control is based on the moisture content in the air, the
same as Predictive Humidity control. The difference between the two programs is
that the iCOM control automatically adjusts the humidity set point as the sensed
air temperature deviates from the programmed temperature set point before it is
sent to the microprocessor control for interpretation. The control then converts the
temperature and humidity values to a moisture content value defined as either
grains per cubic foot or grains per pound. This recalculated humidity set point
value is compared to the content control band to determine operation.
The content band is determined by the:

 Programmed temperature set point
With Compensated humidity control, the humidity set point is automatically

adjusted by 3% RH per 2ºF (1ºC) difference between the sensed air
temperature and the temperature set point. This adjustment is inversely
proportional.
It is important to remember that the unit displays relative humidity %RH not the
actual moisture content value. The moisture content (grains) values are used only
in the internal control program for control operation.
Example: if the temperature set point is 70F (21.1ºC) and sensed air temperature
is 72F (22.2ºC) the recalculated humidity set point will read 6% RH lower and will
be shown as the actual set point value on the display screen.
Note: Remember that when viewing the display humidity graphs or calibrating the
humidity sensors the values are shown in real %RH humidity reading.
37
Dew Point Humidity Control

Dew point humidity control will convert the sensor temperature – humidity values
to a dew point value for control purposes. The following is a brief description of
the control process.
1. The user programs the relative humidity percent value needed for
the unit supply (discharge) air.
2. The unit supply humidity percentage requirement will be calculated
by the control using the unit return temperature – humidity calculated
dew point value and the supply air temperature set point. The
humidity will be shown in %RH on the display.
3. The call for humidification – dehumidification is calculated based on
the difference between the calculated supply air humidity and the
programmed humidity set point.
Shown below is a flow diagram for illustration of the following example.
Unit monitors the sensed temperature and relative humidity. The

unit uses this information to calculate a dew point temperature.
Unit uses the calculated dew point temperature and actual supply
temperature to calculate a supply relative humidity value.
The calculated supply relative humidity value is compared

to desired relative humidity value used to control both
humidification and dehumidification operations.
Remember that dew point temperature is the temperature at which water vapor (at
100% humidity) will begin to condense from the air.
Dew Point Control calculation for dehumidification operation example

Temperature – Calculated
Humidity Values Dew Point
Return Conditions 85F – 38%RH 54F
Actual Supply
64F --
Temperature
Calculated Supply RH 69.5% 54F
Shown on Unit Display
Set Point Values 64F – 50%RH --
38
Based on the above set point values and room conditions the control will activate a
call for dehumidification to reduce the humidity from 69% to 50%.
The humidity proportional control band value is divided into two parts:
● Humidification: humidity set point minus the humidity proportional band.
● Dehumidification: humidity set point plus the dehumidification proportional

band.
A humidity dead band can also be programmed into the control to shift humidity
operations away from the humidity set point. This programmed humidity dead
band value is divided into two parts:
● Humidity set point plus ½ of the dead band – no dehumidification operation
● Humidity set point minus ½ of the band – no humidification operation.
Humidity Control Operations

The iCOM humidification / dehumidification control band is defined by three (3)
parameters that are user selectable:
1. Humidity Set Point

2. Humidity Proportional Band
3. Humidity Dead Band
The humidity proportional band is equally divided above and below the humidity
set point for unit operation as follows:
 Humidity Set Point + ½ Humidity Proportional Band = Dehumidification

 Humidity Set Point - ½ Humidity Proportional Band = Humidification
The separate humidity dead band, if used, will shift the humidification and / or
dehumidification on / off operations away from the humidity. The humidity dead
band value (factory default set at 10%) means dehumidification operation stops
when the humidity being sensed by the control decreases to the humidity set point
plus ½ of the dead value. Humidification operation stops when the humidity being
sensed by the control increases to the humidity set point minus ½ of the dead
value.
The humidity set point range is adjustable from 20 – 80% RH in increments of

1% RH. The humidity proportional band range is adjustable from 1 – 20% RH in
increments of 1% RH. The humidity dead band range is adjustable from
0 – 50% RH in increments of 1% RH.
39
Humidifier Operation
The Relative Humidity control program is used to illustrate the humidification
operation in the following examples. The basic humidification control band is
established at the humidity set point with the length equal to minus ½ of the
programmed humidity proportional band value. Liebert units can be supplied with
either an optional infrared humidifier or an optional steam canister humidifier.
The control activates the humidifier when the air humidity level decreases to 100%
of the humidity control band.
The control deactivates the infrared humidifier and makeup water solenoid valve
when the air humidity level increases to the programmed humidity set point.
Humidification – No Dead Band
HSP - ½ HPB = Humidifcation
Humidification
ON
45 46 47 48 49 50
Humidification
OFF
Humidity Set Point 50%

Humidity Proportional Band 8%
In the above example, that the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point
and has a length of 4%, which is ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band
value. As the air humidity decreases, humidification operation is activated at 46%
or 100% of the humidification control band. When the air humidity starts to
increase, humidification operation is deactivated at the humidity set point.
40
Humidification with Dead Band
HSP – ½ HDB - ½ HPB = Humidification
Humidification ½ of the
ON Humidity
Dead Band
45 46 47 48 49 50
Humidification
OFF

Humidity Dead Band 2%
In the above example that the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point
minus ½ of the programmed dead band value minus ½ of the programmed
humidity proportional band value.
As the air humidity decreases the infrared humidifier is activated at 45% or ½ of

the dead band value plus 100% of the humidification control band. When the air
humidity starts to increase, the infrared humidifier is deactivated at 49% or ½ of
the dead band value plus 0% of the humidification control band.
Water Level Control with Infrared Large (IFL) or Small (IFS) Pans
If the Liebert unit is supplied with the optional infrared humidifier the Water Level
Control software program is an integral part of the humidifier system. The
program automatically controls a water makeup valve to maintain the proper water
level in the humidifier pan during operation. When a call for humidification exists,
the program performs a series of checks.
The first check to see how long the infrared humidifier has been off; if the off time
is equal to or greater than the programmed value (factory default is 15 hours), it is
assumed that the pan is dry and a program called pre-fill is initiated to add water to
the pan. During the pre-fill operation the infrared lamps are inactive. The pre-fill
time is programmable with an adjustable range of 1 to 120 seconds for either pan
size. The factory default for a large (IFL) pan is 57 seconds and for a small (IFS)
pan is 34 seconds.
If the off time is less than 15 hours (or user programmed value) the pre-fill program
is bypassed and the infrared lamps and water valve are activated at the same time
to fill the pan to the proper water level and initiate humidification.
41
During normal infrared humidification operation the water makeup valve is

periodically opened (pan refill) and closed (no pan refill) based on a timing
sequence. This process replenishes the evaporated water from the pan.
With the infrared humidifier water fill rate set at the factory default value of 150%
the water makeup valve will open for 51 seconds of fill time with an off time of 7
minutes between fill cycles for a small pan. For a large pan water makeup valve
will open for 85.5 seconds of fill time with an off time of 10 minutes between fill
cycles. The user can modify the percentage from 110% to a maximum of 500% in
1% increments.
Infrared Humidifier Water Level Control Flow Chart
Humidifier ON
Call for
within last 15
Humidification
hours
HMV Prefill
IFS = 34 seconds
IFL = 57 seconds
HMV and Humidifier Lamps ON

IFS - HMV fills for 4 minutes then closes
IFL - HMV fills for 7 minutes then closes
Humidifier Lamps only ON

IFS - HMV cycles ON every 7 minutes of lamp time
IFL - HMV cycles ON every 10 minutes of lamp time
Humidifier water refill time based

on Infrared Fill Time program
adjustable from 110 – 500%
42
Dehumidification Operation
Dehumidification with Predictive Humidity Control
When predictive humidity control is used, over dehumidification is avoided in the
space. When overcooling occurs, causing an increase in the relative humidity
reading, the humidity control program “predicts” what the RH will be when the
dehumidification cycle ends and the temperature returns to the programmed set
point. This allows the dehumidification cycle to end at the proper time.
The Relative Humidity control program is used to illustrate the dehumidification

operation in the following examples. The basic dehumidification control band is
established at the humidity set point with the length equal to ½ of the programmed
humidity proportional band value.
The humidity control activates the dehumidification operation when the air humidity
level increases to 100% of the humidity proportional band. The humidity control
deactivates dehumidification operation when the air humidity level decreases to
0% of the humidity proportional control band value.
1 Stage Compressor Dehumidification - Challenger3000

Liebert Challenger units are supplied with one (1) stage compressor
dehumidification. When the air humidity level increases to 100% of the humidity
proportional band the unit will operate in the full cooling mode. This means the
optional hot gas bypass on the scroll compressor is disabled or the optional digital
scroll compressor operates in the loaded state.
The humidity control deactivates the compressor when the air humidity level
decreases to 0% of the humidity proportional control band value.
1 Stage Compressor Dehumidification – DS / VS Units

Liebert DS / VS unit is supplied with two (2) compressors. If single compressor
dehumidification is selected (Compressor #1 or #2), that compressor is activated
by the humidity control when the air humidity level increases to 100% of the
humidity proportional band.
The humidity control deactivates the compressor when the air humidity level
decreases to the humidity control set point.
43
1 Stage Compressor Dehumidification – No Dead Band
HSP + ½ HPB = Dehumidification
Dehumidification
ON
50 51 52 53 54 55
Dehumidification
OFF

In the above example, that the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point
and has a length of 4%, which is ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band
value. As the air humidity increases, dehumidification operation is activated at
54% or 100% of the dehumidification control band. When the air humidity starts to
decrease, dehumidification operation is deactivated at the humidity set point or 0%
of the humidity proportional control band.
1 Stage Compressor Dehumidification with Dead Band
HSP + ½ HDB + ½ HPB = Dehumidification
½ of the Dehumidification
Humidity ON
Dead Band
50 51 52 53 54 55
Dehumidification
OFF

44
In the this example the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point plus ½ of
the programmed dead band value plus ½ of the programmed proportional band
value. As the air humidity increases, dehumidification operation is activated at
55% or ½ of the dead band value plus 100% of the dehumidification control band.
When the air humidity starts to decrease, dehumidification operation is deactivated
at 51% or ½ of the dead band value plus 0% of the humidity proportional control
band.
2-Stage Compressor Dehumidification - DS / VS Units

Liebert DS / VS unit is supplied with two (2) compressors. If two compressor
dehumidification is selected and the unit is not cooling the compressors are
individually staged on. If the unit is cooling than the control operates as a single
stage dehumidification device as described earlier.
The basic dehumidification control band is established at the humidity set point
with the length equal to ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band value.
When 2 stage dehumidification is selected, the controller works as follows.
The humidity controller activates the 1st stage of dehumidification operation when
the air humidity level increases to 50% of the humidity proportional band.
The 2nd stage of dehumidification is activated when the air humidity level increases
to 100% of the humidity proportional band.
The humidity controller deactivates the 2nd stage of dehumidification operation

when the air humidity level decreases to 50% of the humidity proportional control
band value. The 1st stage of dehumidification is deactivated when the air humidity
level decreases to the humidity set point or 0% of the humidity proportional band.
2 Stage Compressor Dehumidification – No Dead Band
HSP + (½ TPB  # Dehumidification Stages) = Full Dehumidification
Dehumidification Dehumidification
1st Stage ON 2nd Stage ON
50 51 52 53 54 55
1st stage OFF 2nd Stage OFF

45
In the example, the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point and has a
length of 4%, which is ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band value.
As the air humidity level increases the 1st stage dehumidification operation is
activated at 52% or 50% of the dehumidification control band. If the air humidity
level continues to increase the 2nd dehumidification stage actives at 54%, which
100% of the dehumidification control band.
When the air humidity level decreases to 52% or 50% of the dehumidification
control band the 2nd dehumidification stage is deactivated. When the air humidity
level decreases to the humidity set point of 50% or 0% of the humidity proportional
band the 1st dehumidification stage is deactivated.
If the compressors have unloading capability, 4 stage or digital scroll, the

compressors are activated in the fully loaded condition for each stage of
dehumidification.
2 Stage Compressor Dehumidification with Dead Band
HSP + ½ HDB + (½ TPB  # Dehumidification Stages) = Full Dehumidification

½ of the
Humidity Dehumidification Dehumidification
Dead Band 1st Stage ON 2nd Stage ON
50 51 52 53 54 55
1st Stage OFF 2nd Stage OFF

Humidity Dead Band 2%F
In the above example that the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point
plus ½ of the programmed dead band value plus ½ of the programmed humidity
proportional band value.
As the air humidity level increases, first stage dehumidification operation is

activated at 53% or ½ of the programmed dead band value plus 50% of the
dehumidification control band. If the air humidity level continues to increase the
second dehumidification stage actives at 55% or ½ of the programmed dead value
plus 100% of the programmed humidity proportional control band.
46
When the air humidity level decreases to 53% or ½ of the programmed dead band
value plus 50% of the programmed proportional control band the second
dehumidification stage is deactivated. When the humidity level decreases to 51%
or ½ of the dead band value plus 0% of the programmed proportional control band
the first stage dehumidification deactivated.
Comprerssorized Dehumidification and Electric Heat Operation

The parameter Electric Heat Operation defines how the reheats react when the
return air temperature decreases below the temperature set point during the
dehumidification process. The following are the selections:
Selection Operation
No electric heat allowed during compressorized dehumidification
No
operation.
If normal heat control is selected, the heat stages are turned ON
proportionally through the heating control band. If the
temperature drops to Low Limit 1 then 1 compressor is
temporarily disabled (the dehumidification request is reduced to
Staged 50%). It is re-enabled when the heating requirement is
decreased to Low Limit 1 reset value. If the temperature drops
to Low Limit 2 both compressors are temporarily disabled (the
dehumidification request is reduced to 0%). One of the two
compressors is re-enabled at the Low Limit 2 reset value.
When 1 compressor dehumidification and delayed heat is
selected, the heat stages are turned ON proportionally through
the heating control band.
On 2 compressor dehumidification all stages of electric heat are

Delayed OFF until the air temperature falls to Low Limit 1, then 1 stage of
dehumidification is disabled and full reheat is activated. If the air
temperature falls to Low Limit 2, both stages of dehumidification
are disabled. One stage of dehumidification will be re-enabled
at the Low Limit 2 reset value. Both stages of dehumidification
are re-enabled at the Low Limit 1 reset value.
Warning:
Dehumidification with normal heat allows both compressors and all heat stages to
operate simultaneously. It is very important that the electrical service to the unit
be sized and wired for this option if selected. If not sized properly the electrical
service could experience nuisance trips and or possible damage to building circuit
breakers (or Fuses) and wiring.
47
Chilled Water Dehumidification – No Dead Band

Liebert units supplied with chilled water for cooling also use the chilled water for
dehumidification. The humidity control operates the chilled water control valve to
regulate the fluid flow to the cooling coil. Liebert uses a standard actuator type
motor or optional modulating type motor to drive the valve open / closed for flow
control. The dehumidification control band is established at the humidity set point
with the length equal to ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band. The
control valve travel is proportional within the dehumidification control band.
The control begins to activate (open) the chilled water valve cooling when the air
humidity increases to 10% of the dehumidification control band through 100%
travel when the air humidity increases to 100% of the dehumidification control
band. As the dehumidification demand decreases the control will close the valve
until the air humidity decreases to the humidity set point value or 0% of the
humidity control band value.
The actuator valve motor is driven open / closed by a 24 VAC signal from the
control. Triac switch Q17 (open) or Triac switch Q18 (close) are used to operate
the valve, only one triac switch can be operated at a time. The 24 VAC signal can
be checked at plug P22 on the control board.
The modulating valve motor is powered by a 24 VAC signal but is positioned by a

variable DC voltage signal, both signals come from the control. Both voltage
signals can be checked at plug P52 on the control board.
In the fallowing example the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point and
has a length of 4%, which is ½ of the programmed humidity proportional band
value.
Chilled Water Dehumidification – No Dead Band
HSP + ½ HPB = Full Dehumidification
CW Valve
100% Open
50 51 52 53 54 55
CW Valve
0% open

48
As the air humidity increases, the chilled water valve is activated at 54% which is
100% of the dehumidification control band.
When the air humidity decreases the control will close the valve until fully closed
when the return air humidity decreases to the humidity set point value or 0% of the
dehumidification control band value.

In the following example the control band begins at the 50% humidity set point and
has a length of 5%, which is ½ of the programmed humidity dead band value plus
½ of the programmed humidity proportional band value.
Chilled Water Dehumidification with Dead Band
HSP + ½ HDB + ½ HPB = Full Dehumidification
½ of the
Temperature CW Valve
Dead Band 100% Open
50 51 52 53 54 55
CW Valve
0% Open

As the air humidity increases, the chilled water valve is activated at 55% which is
½ of the programmed dead band value plus 100% of the dehumidification control
band.
When the air humidity decreases the control will close the valve until fully closed
when the return air humidity decreases to the humidity set point value plus ½ of
the dead band value plus 0% of the dehumidification control band value.
49
Fan Control Operation

Liebert units can be supplied with several different fan options as follows:
Challenger3000: 1 - on / off fan motor with one blower

DS - downflow: 1 - on / off motor with 1 to 3 blowers
1 – VFD (Variable Fanspeed) Drive controlled motor
with 1 to 3 blowers
1 to 3 Electronically Commuted (EC) fan motors
CW – downflow: 1 - on / off motor with one to three blowers
1 – VFD (Variable Fanspeed Drive) controlled motor
with 1 to 3 blowers
1 to 6 EC (Electronically Commuted) fan motors
VS - upflow: 1 - on / off motor with 1 to 3 blowers
with 1 to 3 blowers
1 to 3 EC (Electronically Commuted) fan motors field
installed in a plenum located on top of the unit
CW – upflow: 1 - on / off motor with 1 to 3 blowers
with 1 to 3 blowers
1 to 3 EC (Electronically Commuted) fan motors field
installed in a plenum located on top of the unit
EC Fan Control Operation

Liebert units can be supplied with optional Electronically Commuted (EC) fan
motors installed in the down-flow units or in a plenum mounted to the top of the
vertical-flow units. The control will use either of two (2) control programs to
operate the fans. The choices are Automatic Mode (factory default setting) or
Manual Mode. Additionally the fan speed will be automatically adjusted by certain
operating situations.
When Automatic Mode is selected the fan speed default range for units with
compressors is 70 to 100% and for chilled water units is 60 to 100%. The
programmable range can vary from 70% minimum to 100% maximum. If Manual
Mode is selected the default fan speed is 75%.
50
Automatic Mode
When the fan control type is set to the Automatic Mode (factory default), the fans
will operate in the variable fan speed control mode, ramping up / down based on
the sensed temperature. The fans can use any of the three Temperature Control
Sensor modes for operation. The three Temperature Control Sensor modes are:
1. Return Temperature - Humidity Sensor Assembly (standard) - Fan

speed is controlled by the temperature – humidity sensor assembly that
is located return air section of the unit. Only one Return Temperature –
Humidity Sensor Assembly can be connected to the individual unit as a
control device.
2. Supply Temperature Sensor (optional) – Fan speed is controlled by the

temperature of the air being supplied to the space cold aisle. The
supply temperature sensor is located in supply (discharge) air section of
the unit. Only one Supply sensor can be connected to the individual
unit.
3. Remote 2T Temperature Sensor(s) (optional) – Fan speed is controlled

by the temperature being sensed at the remote (rack) temperature
sensor location(s). A maximum of 10 – 2T Remote sensor assemblies
can be connected to an individual unit.
The objective of modulating fan speed is to maintain a constant air temperature to

the space.
Manual Mode
When set to Manual Mode, the fans will operate at a fixed speed. The Fan Speed
Manual Set Point parameter determines the fixed fan speed. The factory default
setting is 75% with an adjustable range of 70 – 100%.
Manual Fan Speed during Dehumidification

When the fans are operating in the manual mode without a call for cooling, the
fans will ramp to the fan speed set in the parameter Fan Speed Dehumidification.
When the fans are operating in the manual mode with a call for cooling, the fans
will ramp between speeds as set in Fan Speed Dehumidification and Fan Speed
Minimum parameters depending on the % of cooling demand.
Auto Fan Speed during Dehumidification

When fans are operating in the automatic mode without a call for cooling, the fans
will operate as set in Fan Speed Dehumidification parameter. Should a call for
dehumidification occur with the fan speed below Fan Speed Dehumidification
parameter value the fans will cycle between the Fan Speed Minimum and Fan
Speed Dehumidification parameter values.
When fans are operating in the automatic mode with a call for cooling, the fans will
ramp to the highest programmed parameter speed as set in Fan Speed
51
Dehumidification or Fan Speed Minimum in parameters or will match cooling

demand as explained earlier.
.
Additional Programs
Auto Restart
When the unit is operating and a power outage occurs the control will provide an
automatic timed restart once power had been restored to the unit (factory default is
set at 5 seconds). The unit will start and the loads will sequence on with the Fan
first, then so forth until all loads are on as the room requirement demands.
If the units are stand-a-lone or networked and programmed as No Teamwork or

Teamwork 2, the units will restart based on their individually programmed restart
time delay value.
If units are networked and in Teamwork 1 or Teamwork 3 operation, the units

will stage on based on the programmed restart time delay value plus their U2U
(unit-2-unit) address starting at unit #1 and counting upward. This program will
insure that only one units restarts at a time.
Fan Alarm / Fan settings

The fan operation is controlled by two (2) digital devices: the Loss of Airflow
differential pressure switch and the Main fan overload motor protection. The time
delay at the unit start is always 5 seconds shorter than the control delay.
High Pressure Cutout
When the compressor is commanded to turn ON after being OFF for a period of 10
minutes, or if the power has been removed from the unit and then turned back on,
this sequence of operations happens:
During the first 10 minutes of the compressor being turned ON after the above
situation, if a high head pressure situation occurs, the compressor will be turned
OFF for 10 seconds and then turned back ON again “as long as the high head
pressure input has been reset”. This will happen with no alarm indication. The
alarm will be “masked out”. This can happen 3 times within the first 10 minutes of
compressor being turned on.
These HP situations will not be visible on the service menu screens, but will be
counted on an internal counter, not shown on the display. This internal counter
increases by 1, regardless if 1, 2 or 3 HP alarms were masked out within the first
10 minutes after compressor start.
If a high head pressure situation occurs a fourth time (or if the HP input remains in
alarm position continuously for 30 seconds) in the first 10 minutes of running, the
compressor will be Locked OFF, an alarm will happen, and the counter of the
affected circuit will show “1” alarm occurred. Reaching “1” will lockout the
compressor and it will not come back on until main power is reset or the HP1 and /
or HP2 counters are reset to 0 in the Diagnostics / Service menus. Setting the
counter to 0 (zero) will auto-reset the alarm without the need of pressing the reset
52
button on the control display. Setting the visible counter to 0 (zero) will also reset
the internal counter to 0 (zero); the internal counter also will be reset to 0 (zero)
after a power cycle. This has in effect masked out the first three high head
pressure situations if they are within the first 10 minutes of starting.
Note: if the unit is equipped with manual reset high head pressure switches, or if
the auto reset high head pressure switches don’t reset, the compressor will not be
turned back on in the above situation, but there will be a 30 second delay from
when the high head pressure situation occurs and when the alarm is enunciated.
High Head Pressure upon Startup continued:

If the above “situation” happens 3 times in a rolling twelve-hour period (that means
the internal counter reaches 3) the compressor will be locked out and will not
come back on until main power is reset or the HP1 and / or HP2 counters are reset
to 0 in the Diagnostics / Service menus. “Situation” is defined exactly as above.
That is if within the first 10 minutes of a compressor startup if the compressor has
been off for at least 10 minutes 1, 2, or 3 high head situations have been masked
out “inhibited”. If this situation has occurred 3 times with 1 to 3 high head
situations being masked out in three startup situations that have occurred within a
12 hour period, turn off that compressor, alarm high head pressure, and lock out
the compressor. The compressor will not come back on until main power is reset
or the HP1 and / or HP2 counters are reset to 0 in the Diagnostics / Service
menus.
High Pressure Internal Counter

The internal counter can have 4 states 0, 1 and 2 are OK states, no alarm will
activate. If the “Situation”, which caused the counter to increase by 1 becomes
older than 12 hours, the value of the counter will be decreased by 1 again.
State 3 is alarm state: it shows as “1” on the HP1 and / or HP2 counters in the
Diagnostics / Service menus and locks out the compressor.
53
54
Suction Pressure Transducers

Units with compressors use pressure transducers on the low side of the system
instead of low pressure switches. The Low Pressure Device Type should be set to
ANALOG. The transducer pressure measurements are read at 1 second intervals.
During all other operating times for the compressors additional pressure
measurements are read based on operating at “limit conditions” for 5 seconds and
shall not include readings taken during pump down (if enabled) or the Low
Pressure Delay Time (LPDT) timeout.
Call for Compressor (Cooling or Dehumidification) w/Transducers

Note: The following applies for both R22 and R407C refrigerant systems with all
compressor types.
When the compressor starts, the low pressure delay time (LPDT) value is ignored
for a selected period of time. This LPDT value is factory set as follows:
 3 minutes on air cooled units with fan speed condensers
 0 minutes on air cooled units with lee-temp condensers
 0 minutes on water or glycol cooled units with semi-hermetic or scroll
compressor(s)
 1 minute on water or glycol units supplied with digital scroll compressor(s)
and motorized ball valves
After a Call for Compressor

a) With Low Pressure Delay Time (LPDT) set to = 0: the Liquid Line Solenoid
Valve (LLSV) opens, after one reading above Threshold 1 the compressor
starts (earliest 1 second after LLSV opens). Flow moves to Phase 2 for all
compressors.
b) With Low Pressure Delay Time set to ≠ 0: the LLSV opens, 1 second later
the compressor starts. The “flow” is now in Phase 1.
NON Digital Scroll Compressors

The compressor(s) continue to run for LPDT value. If any single reading during
the LPDT is above Threshold 1 "and" the last reading (when LPDT elapses) is
above the pump down cut-out value, the “flow” is now in Phase 2. The very first 6
minutes of phase 2 ignores all thresholds, except the Loss of Charge threshold.
After 6 minutes the “flow” changes into Phase 3 and starts check about NOT being
below Low Pressure Threshold 2 continuously for 240 seconds (the average value
of 3 minutes is used). If so, continue operation.
Note: Semi-hermetic (4-step) compressors shall run at 100% (capacity unloader
valve off) during the whole LPDT sequence.
Note: On units with Digital Scroll Compressors the unloader is energized 0.1
second before the compressor contactor is energized.
The compressor(s) run at 50% for the LPDT value. For the last 30 seconds of the
LPDT value, run compressor at 100%. If the reading shows values continuously
above the threshold 1 for 15 seconds any time during the LPDT time, "and" the
last reading (when LPDT elapses) is above the pump down cut-out value, the
55
"flow" moves to Phase 2 and in parallel the Loss of Charge Protection starts. If
15 seconds has elapsed, and the pressure was not continuously above TH1, the
next 15 seconds window will start, where the pressure again has to be
continuously above TH1 before to move to the next Phase. The “flow” is now in
Phase 2. The very first 6 minutes of phase 2 ignores all thresholds, except the
Loss of Charge threshold.
After 6 minutes the “flow” changes into Phase 3 and starts check about NOT being
below Low Pressure Threshold 2 continuously for 240 seconds (the average value
of 3 minutes is used). If so, continue operation.
Low Pressure Phase Conditions

Failure in Phase 1
If Phase 1 has elapsed, the “flow” moves to Phase 4, with a maximum waiting time
of 5 minutes, where it is looking for a single reading above Threshold 1. If
reached, the “flow” moves to Phase 2. NOTE: The compressor is OFF, no Pump
down, LLSV is OPEN.
Failure in Phase 4
If pressure is not reached in Phase 4, the “flow” moves to phase 5: Sound Alarm
(Code 1), stop compressors, leave LLSV open, no pump down; and waits a single
reading to be above threshold 1 to move to Phase 2. This waiting phase will last
forever or as long as there is a call for cooling. The compressor may operate
during the alarm is active, once the pressure conditions allow for it (see above).
Failure in Phase 3
If the average pressure is continuously below the threshold 2 for 240 seconds, the
compressor will be stopped (and allowed to pump-down [NOTE: Pump Down shall
be performed before stopping the compressor, if the actual pressure is above the
cut-out value]), and waits 600 seconds (Phase 6). If elapsed, the “flow” moves to
Phase 1. If Phase 2 failure happens 2 times in one (rolling) hour, a message will
be set, and the compressor continues to cycle between Phase 1, then Phase 2
and probably Phase 6.
If the unit was operating in DX + FC Mode (and the FC valve is open), at the first
leaving of Phase 6 the “flow” will check (after the 600 seconds compressor off
time) to see if the actual unit temperature is above the DT 3 value. If true, then
Freecooling will be disabled (Phase 10) for maximum of 1 hour or until both
compressors are off (Freecooling will be disabled inside this 1 hour when 1
compressor restarts), and the compressor continues to cycle between Phase 1,
then Phase 2 and probably Phase 6. If the call for cooling goes away, Phase 10 is
reset, 1-hour timer.
Loss of Charge Protection

After Phase 1, once the pressure reaches the low pressure cut-out (single reading)
the “flow” moves to phase 8: Wait 5 minutes to reach one single reading above
Threshold 1. If OK move back to Phase 2, if NOK then move to Phase 9 and
sound Alarm (Code 3), stop compressors, leave LLSV open, no pump down; and
56
continue to wait a single reading to be above Threshold 1 to move to Phase 2.

This waiting phase will last forever or as long as there is a call for cooling. The
compressor may operate during the alarm is active, once the pressure conditions
allow for it.
Phases Conditions
1 Low Pressure Time Delay (LPTD)
2 Start of Freeze Protection (6 minutes Threshold Phase 2 ignored)
3 Freeze Protection (4 minutes of 3 minutes worth of averages)
Pressure not reached during LPTD. Waiting on one reading above
4 Threshold Phase 1. LLSV open and compressor OFF. Five minute
wait time.
5 Low Pressure Alarm (Code 1)
6 Compressor off for 10 minutes. LLSV Closed.
7 Freeze Protection Message (Code 2)
Off on Loss of Charge. Waiting on one reading above Threshold
8
Phase 1. LLSV open and compressor OFF. Five minute wait time.
Disable Freecooling for one hour. Compressor(s) will operate during
10
this time.
See Flow Chart on next page.
57
Pump Down
If the pump down parameter is enabled and there is a call to turn off the
compressor the LLSV is closed. If the low suction transducer value does not
reach the pump down cutout parameter value within 60 seconds the LLSV is
turned on than back off (to try to un-stick the LLSV). The control waits another 60
seconds trying to reach the cutout value, this process will be repeated 3 times. If,
after 3 times, the low suction pressure switch does not open, the compressor and
LLSV are locked off and an alarm “Pump Down not completed” will appear.
An additional internal program called pump down recycle is used to control

compressor pump cycling. The control will re-pump down the compressor circuit
if the transducer-value goes higher than the pump down recycle parameter value
58
after the compressor has been stopped (turned off). A maximum of 6 re-pump
down cycles per hour are allowed by the control per compressor circuit. At the 7th
request of re-pump down the alarm “Pump Down Fail” will appear and the
compressor will be locked out.
Pump down is always performed with the compressor in the loaded state
(unloader or digital scroll valve de-energized or closed).
Low Pressure Switches

Units supplied with low pressure switches have fixed cut-in and cut-out values.
The Low Pressure Device Type parameter should be set to SWITCH.
When the compressor starts, the low-pressure digital input is ignored for a
selected period of time. This LPDT value is factory set as follows:
 3 minutes on air cooled units with fan speed condensers
 0 minutes on air cooled units with lee-temp condensers
 0 minutes on water or glycol cooled units with semi-hermetic or scroll
compressor(s)
 1 minute on water or glycol units supplied with digital scroll compressor(s)
and motorized ball valves
Call for Compressor (Cooling or Dehumidification) w/ Pressure Switches

After a Call for Cooling (CFC):
a) With Low Pressure Delay Time set to = 0: the LLSV opens, after one input
OK reading the compressor starts (earliest 1 second after LLSV) Flow
moves to phase 3 for both, digital scroll and all compressors.
b) With Low Pressure Delay Time set to ≠ 0: the LLSV opens, 1 second later
the compressor starts.
The “flow” is now in Phase 1.
NON Digital Scroll compressors

Let the compressor continue to run for LPDT value. If at the end of the LPDT time
the switch is closed the flow moves to "Loss of Charge Protection" (Phase 3), and
Phase 1 is finished.
Note: Semi-hermetic (4-step) compressors shall run at 100% (capacity valve off)
during the whole LPDT sequence.
Digital Scroll compressors

Note: On units with Digital Scroll Compressors the unloader is energized 0.1
second before the compressor contactor is energized.
Let the compressor run at 50% capacity for the LPDT value. For the last 30
seconds of the LPDT value, run compressor at 100%. If at the end of the LPDT
time the switch is closed the flow moves to "Loss of Charge Protection" (Phase 3),
and Phase 1 is finished. The “flow” is now in Phase 3, Loss of charge
protection. The “flow” checks about having the digital input continuously OK for 5
seconds. If so, continue operation.
59
Low Pressure Phase Conditions

Failure in Phase 1
If Phase 1 is elapsed, the “flow” moves to Phase 4, with a maximum waiting time
of 5 minutes, where it is looking for a single reading to be OK. If OK, then “flow”
moves to “Loss of charge protection”.
NOTE: The compressor is OFF, no Pump down, LLSV is OPEN.
Failure in Phase 4
If pressure is not reached in Phase 4, the “flow” moves to phase 5: Sound an
alarm (Code 1), stop the compressors, leave the LLSV open, no pump down; and
waits a single reading to be above threshold 1 to move to Phase 3, “Loss of
charge protection”. This waiting phase will last forever or as long as there is a call
for cooling. The compressor may operate during the alarm is active, once the
pressure conditions allow for it (see above).
Phase 3
After Phase 1, once the pressure input is NOK, the “flow” moves to Phase 8: Waits
5 minutes to reach one single OK reading. If OK continue operation, if NOK then
move to Phase 9 and sound an alarm (Code 3), stop the compressors, leave LLSV
open, no pump down; and continue to wait a single OK to start normal compressor
operation. This waiting phase will last forever or as long as there is a call for
cooling. The compressor may operate during the alarm is active, once the
pressure conditions allow for it (see above).
Pump Down
If the pump down parameter is enabled, anytime a compressor is turned OFF and
the low-pressure switch is closed (pressure OK), the compressor will be operated
with the LLSV (liquid line solenoid valve) closed (de-energized) until the low-
pressure switch opens (low pressure condition, without giving alarm). When there
is a call to turn off a compressor the LLSV is closed. If the low suction pressure
switch (LPS) does not open within 60 seconds the LLSV is turned on than back off
(to try to unstuck the LLSV). The control waits another 60 seconds for the LPS to
open, this will happen 3 times. If, after 3 times, the low suction pressure switch
does not open, the compressor and LLSV are locked off and an alarm “Pump
Down Fail” will appear.
There is a re-pump down if the LPS opens again after the compressor has been
already stopped – a maximum of 6 re-pump-down cycles per hour are allowed: at
the 7th request of re-pump down the alarm “Pump Down Fail” will appear and the
compressor will be locked out.
Pump down is always performed loaded (unloaders are de-energized or closed).
60
Phases Conditions
1 Winter Start (Low Pressure Time Delay)
3 Loss of Charge
Does not make Winter Start. Waiting on closure of pressure
4
switch. LLSV open and compressor OFF. 5 minute wait time.
Off on Loss of Charge. Waiting on closure of pressure switch.
8
LLSV open and compressor OFF. 5 minute wait time.
Short Cycle
If the unit is installed in a lightly loaded space the compressor(s) may experience a
short cycle operating condition. Short cycle operation on your Liebert is defined as
the compressor cycling On / Off 10 times in a rolling 60 minute time period. This
compressor cycling will also generate a Compressor Short Cycle alarm.
When this condition occurs a control program becomes active which will delay the
compressor from starting the next time for three (3) minutes, called the minimum
compressor off time. Once the compressor starts it will operate for a minimum of
three (3) minutes, called minimum compressor run time, before turning off. The
three (3) minutes are a factory set default program and may be charged by the
service technician.
Low Pressure Management

The iCOM control manages the system suction pressure between 56 psi (3.8 bars)
to 206 psi (14.2 bars) for systems using R22 or R407C refrigerant. During
operating periods of low load the suction pressure may decrease making the
evaporator inefficient and at times creating ice on the coil surface. To prevent this
from occurring, the control will automatically adjust the variable fan speed and / or
the variable compressor capacity to raise the suction pressure.
Variable Speed Fan(s): If the suction pressure goes below 56 psi (3.8 bars) the
EC or VFD controlled fan(s) will increase their speed until the pressure increases
to 59 psi (4.0 bars) or the maximum fan speed is reached.
Variable Capacity Compressor(s): If the suction pressure goes below 68 psi (4.7
bars) the compressor capacity will be reduced until the pressure increases to 71
psi (4.9 bars) or the minimum compressor capacity is reached.
High Pressure Management

Air cooled condensers with variable speed condenser fans will adjust the
condenser fan speed to maintain head pressure.
61
Penn Pressure Switch or VFD Fan speed controlled fans will maintain the head
pressure at 190 psi (13.1 bars) by decreasing the speed of the variable fan
whenever the pressure decreases below the non-adjustable 190 psi (13.1 bars)
set point. The indoor unit is also monitoring the differential pressure, the
difference between the suction and head pressure, to maintain a minimum of 80
psi (5.5 bars). If the room load condition decreases the suction pressure will
increase causing the differential to decrease below 80 psi (5.5 bars). When this
condition occurs the system will increase the 4 –step or digital scroll
compressor(s) capacity to maintain the correct differential.
EC Fan speed controlled fans will maintain the head pressure between 203 psi
(14.0 bars) and 235 psi (16.2 bars) for systems using R22 or R407C refrigerant by
decreasing the variable fan speed whenever the pressure exceeds the non-
adjustable 190 psi (13.1 bars) set point. The indoor unit is also monitoring the
differential pressure, the difference between the suction and head pressure, to
maintain a minimum of 80 psi (5.5 bars). If the room load condition decreases the
suction pressure will increase causing the differential to decrease below 80 psi
(5.5 bars). When this condition occurs the system will increase the 4 –step or
digital scroll compressor(s) capacity to maintain the correct differential.
If the indoor iCOM control is communicating with the MC Condenser via CANbus
the outside condenser fan speed, the indoor unit fan speed and the compressor
capacity changes will be coordinated by the iCOM control.
62
Next Maintenance Calculation

The next maintenance calculation, if enabled, is a program used to help evaluate
the unit’s general mechanical operation. The program can be used as a way to
optimize the need for equipment servicing based on individual component starting
/ stopping. The next scheduled maintenance time as calculated by the control can
be extended or reduced based on the programmed values entered into the control.
Maintenance Parameters
The following components, as provided on the unit, are included in the calculation
individually:
 Fan(s)
 Compressor #1
 Compressor #2
 Electric Heaters
 Humidifier
If the program is enabled all components in the unit must be included in the set
up.
For each individual component the next maintenance will be calculated from
following parameters:
1. Standard service interval: 0 (no) or 1 through 12 times per year (customer

programmed value).
2. Working hours (counted by control).
3. Number of starts (counted by control).
4. Average running time (calculated by control).
5. Starts per day Best (customer programmed value).
6. Starts per day Worst (customer programmed value).
7. Maximum bonus to enlarge the time period until the next maintenance
(customer programmed value of 1 to 12).
8. Maximum penalty to reduce the time period unit the next maintenance
(customer programmed value of 1 to 12).
9. Number of associated alarms and warnings (counted by the control).
Calculating the Next Maintenance Time Interval

The calculation for next maintenance is a four (4) step process.
Step #1: the control calculates a daily grade based on the number of actual
component starts compared to the average value of the customer programmed
“Starts per day Best” and “Starts per day Worst” values. The control takes this
average and counts the component starts and stops comparing to this average. If
the number of counted starts and stops stays below this average an internal value
of 1 is assigned, if the starts and stops exceed this average and internal value
of -1 is assigned. These internal values are accumulative for the maintenance
time period and will cancel each other out if the component unit performs in an
efficient manner.
63
Step #2: the control will adjust the “Standard Service Interval” based on the
customer programmed Maximum bonus and Maximum penalty values. If the
calculated control grade is positive it will extend the next scheduled maintenance
by the programmed bonus value. If the calculated control grade is negative it will
decrease the next scheduled maintenance by the programmed penalty. If both the
bonus / penalty values are set to 0, there is no effect on the next scheduled
maintenance value. Based on the Standard Service Interval programmed by the
customer the bonus / penalty can be days or weeks or months.
Step #3: the displayed maintenance date is based on the standard service
interval entered into the control to enable the program. This date is initially based
on all the unit components operating in the best starts per calculation plus any
bonus valves as calculated by the control. If any component operates in the worst
starts per plus the penalty values the displayed maintenance time period will
decrease based on the control.
Step #4: When the calculated time interval has been reached the display icon for
this program will start blinking and the display will automatically show the “Service
Contact Information” screen which tells the customer it is time to service the unit
and who to contact. Pressing the “ESC” key returns the display to the status
screens.
If the customer does not call for service the maintenance screen prompt will
continue to be displayed for daily for 30 days if no action is taken by the customer.
After 30 days the condition be annunciated as an alarm condition and will not be
cleared until the “Confirm PM” program has been confirmed which will then clear
the alarm and calculate the scheduled maintenance date.
If the maintenance frequency is set to “0” the program is not enabled. and
working hours of the component, as well as the number of starts.
Alarm or Warning indications will decrease the time to next maintenance

immediately to 0. If the alarm was reset, the original situation will be displayed
again, but the alarm will be counted in the diagnostics window.
If the program is not enabled it will still display the following parameter information
for use by the service technician:
1. Component total working hours (counted by control).

2. Number of starts of each component (counted by control).
3. Average running time (calculated by control).
4. Number of associated alarms and warnings (counted by the control).
This displayed information will continue to accumulate from service call to service
call. To reset the component values to “0” the service technician must confirm the
Next PM program.
64
Networking and Communications

The maximum number of iCOM controlled units that can be networked into a
single private group is 32 units. To network into a group, three or more units,
requires at least one (1) large display be supplied within the network or group.
The maximum numbers of groups that can be selected is 99.
The Liebert iCOM network is a Class C Private Network and will use the
192.168.254.001 to 192.168.254.254 series of static IP addresses. The iCOM
network is separate from the local building or owner network. The iCOM Network
may only be connected to these networks through the optional OCWEB Card
(ethernet web / SNMP communications) or the OC-485 Card (RS485 Modbus for
BMS / EMS communications). These optional cards are installed in the Intellislot
housing located inside the Liebert unit. These cards must be setup by a qualified
service technician before they can be connected to and communicate outside of
the Liebert unit.
OpenComm OCWEB Card OpenComms OC-485 Card
Teamwork Operation
Teamwork allows a group of units to function as a group providing multiple cooling,
heating, humidification and dehumidification stages increasing the overall
efficiency of the control units as a team. The network can be programmed for No
Teamwork, Teamwork Mode 1 (Parallel), Teamwork Mode 2 (Independent) or
Teamwork Mode 3 (Smart Aisle) for control operation.
When a network is setup and Teamwork Mode 1 (Parallel Operation) or Teamwork

Mode 2 (Independent Operation or Teamwork Mode 3 (Smart Aisle Control)
operation the control parameters are shared by all of units in the network. The unit
selected as the Lead Unit, #1 U2U address, will send the operating requirements
to each active unit in the group. However, if a unit(s) in the group is not active it
will be ignored until it becomes active and the parameters will be shared within 2
minutes of activation.
No Teamwork
In this mode all of the network units are working independently for control and
operation. No programmed values or sensor
65
values are shared. The System View will show the averaged temperature and
humidity conditions of all networked units. While in this mode units may be setup
to provide the Standby and Unit Rotation (Lead / Lag) functions. However units
may not be setup for Cascade operation. If network switch fails the units will
continue to operate.
Teamwork Mode 1 – Balanced load small group of units

In this mode all of the unit parameters (system settings) are shared. If a
programmed value is changed in any unit, all of the units within the group will
follow the same programmed settings. The lead unit, U2U address #1, will read
the return air temperature and humidity conditions of the networked units and send
the operating requirements to the units based on their U2U address. Networked
units operate as a single large multi-stage unit.
 If the network switch fails all units operate independently
 Autoset automatically adjusts the temperature proportional band for each
unit networked to 12ºF (6.7ºC)
 Networking may require PI temperature be used control be used
 Averaged temperature and humidity conditions are shown in System View
 Unit operation based on the averaged temperature and humidity values of
all operating networked units comparing set point and proportional band
values
 Unit #1 calculates the system deviation (0 - 100%) and determines the
operating requirements by equally dividing the temperature and humidity
bands by the available units. As a 2 unit example for cooling: the TSP =
73F (23.0C) and the TPB = 12F (6.7C) the units will stage on through ½
of the TPB divided by 2 units as follows:
73F + 3F (unit #1 at 100% cooling) + 3F (unit #2 at 100% cooling).
To avoid having the compressors cycling too quickly the temperature

proportional band needs to be set wide enough to compensate for the
number of units in the network group. All unit operations will follow this
example with unit #1 fully operational before going to the next unit in
network. This applies to all networked unit operations.
 Standby operation (no cascade) all unit fans operating

 Cascade operation
 Dehumidification low limit and supply limit are controlled locally by each unit
in operation
 Operates by staging loads on starting with the #1 unit and will rotate this
function every 24 hours
66
Teamwork Mode 2 (Independent Operation) – Unbalanced loads

programmed value is changed in any unit, all of the units within the group will
follow the same programmed settings. The lead unit, U2U address #1, will read
the sensed temperature and humidity conditions of the networked units of all
connected units, but each unit will operate independently on its own sensors.
 Autoset will not automatically adjust the proportional band
 Uses the average temperature and humidity readings to release all units to
operate in Cooling, Heating, Humidification, or Dehumidification
 Each unit in the network operates on its own temperature and humidity
sensors
 Opposite operational functions are prevented (stops fighting)
 Standby – Lead / Lag allowed
 No Cascade of standby unit(s)
 Can use rack sensors for averages or maximum temperature for operation
Teamwork Mode 3 (Smart Aisle Control)

programmed value is changed in any unit, all units within the group will follow the
same programmed settings. The lead unit, U2U address #1, will read the sensed
temperature and humidity conditions of networked units and send the operating
requirements to the units based on their U2U address. Networked units will
operate in a parallel control.
 Autoset will not automatically adjust the proportional band
 Uses the average temperature and humidity readings to release all units to
operate in Cooling, Heating, Humidification, or Dehumidification
 Each unit in the network operates on its own temperature and humidity
sensors
 Opposite operational functions are prevented (stops fighting)
 Standby – Lead / Lag available, but NOT recommended
 Cascade of standby unit(s) is available
 Fans will operate in a parallel configuration
 Compressors will operate in an Independent configuration
67
Unit Lead / Lag Function

This program will allow the user to select the multi-unit function of Lead / Lag
operation of the networked units. The lead / lag program allows for two
operational modes. First, the units will rotate from lead to lag whenever a
customer specified alarm condition occurs in the lead unit. This will help ensure
that space environmental control requirements are maintained. Secondly, the
customer can program the units to rotate based on time (daily, weekly or monthly)
to maintain the operational status of the units.
 If using optional remote sensors for control and the individual unit remote
sensors fail, the networked unit will operate using the other unit sensors
 If the optional remote sensors fail and the unit has the optional supply
temperature sensor the variable fan speed will be controlled by the supply
sensor
 If the optional supply temperature sensor fails the unit will default to 100%
fan speed and 100% cooling capacity
 If the network switch fails or communication is lost, all of the units will run
independently based on their own sensors
 Opposite operational functions prevented, stops unit fighting
Typical Lead / Lag Function

The Lead / Lag function may be used in the no teamwork mode or any of the three
teamwork modes of operation. The typical configuration is to rotate on either an
alarm condition or on a timed rotation to keep the unit operation with active
operating time on them. One or more units can be defined as lead (operating) and
lag (standby), the normal status of the lag (standby) unit(s) is off.
The order of lead (operating) and lag (standby) units is determined by the U2U
address of the networked group of units. The initial setup is determined by the
number of standby units selected in the service menu of the control. If there are
four units in the networked group and the number of standby units is selected as
two then the two highest U2U addressed unit go to standby.
The lead / lag operational sequence has the lead (running) unit(s) operating. If an
alarm becomes active, the active alarm will cause the first lag (standby) unit to turn
on to help maintain the space conditions. If multiple units are selected as lag
(standby) the units will continue to rotate on active alarms as long as a lag unit is
available. If there are no lag (standby) units left in the sequence the first failed will
restart (if not in a critical alarm state i.e. fan overload, etc).
The lag unit will start one minute after the alarm becomes active. The unit with the
active alarm will operate in the fan only mode for 3 minutes before going into the
standby mode to stabilize its internal conditions, and then it will turn off.
68
Example A: In a basic 4 unit configuration, units 1, 2 and 3 are programmed to be

the lead (operating) units with unit 4 is programmed to be lag (standby). The
“Rotate By” parameter is programmed to 1 unit. When the control calls for the
units to rotate by “1 unit” the following sequence occurs:
Unit 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Initial Setup
Number Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation
1 Operating Standby Operating Operating Operating
2 Operating Operating Standby Operating Operating
3 Operating Operating Operating Standby Operating
4 Standby Operating Operating Operating Standby
In this configuration, by the fourth rotation the units are back to the original setup -
units 1, 2 and 3 lead (operating) with unit 4 in lag (standby).
Example B: In a basic 4 unit configuration, units 1 and 2 are programmed to be

the lead (operating) units with units 3 and 4 are programmed to be lag (standby).
The “Rotate By” parameter is programmed to 2 units. When the control calls for
the units to rotate by “2 units” the following sequence occurs:
Unit 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Initial Setup
Number Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation
1 Operating Standby Operating Standby Operating
2 Operating Standby Operating Standby Operating
3 Standby Operating Standby Operating Standby
4 Standby Operating Standby Operating Standby
In this configuration, by every second rotation the units are back to the original
setup - units 1 and 2 lead (operating) with units 3 and 4 in lag (standby).
As an additional control the service technician can enable the parameter “Start all
Standby units by HT” (Start all Standby units by High Temperature Alarm). This
parameter will keep all lead (operating) active and will start all available standby
units. This operation is initiated whenever a lead (operating) unit senses a high
temperature alarm condition. The standby unit(s) will continue to operate until the
return air temperature sensed by the unit that initiated the alarm decreases to a
value of 4°F (2.2°C) below the high temperature alarm set point. When the alarm
has cleared the units will return to the lead / lag setup.
Cascade
When Teamwork Mode 1 or Teamwork Mode3 and cascade operation is selected
the lag (standby) units will stage on / off as needed to “help” the operating units
69
control the room. If the temperature and/or humidity condition exceeds the
programmed control range, the cascaded units are switched ON before a high or
low temperature or humidity alarm occurs. The cascaded units are switched OFF
again when the temperature and/or humidity conditions return to the programmed
control range. Once a cascaded unit is turned on, the unit will operate for a
minimum of 30 minutes before turning back off.
 Starts the standby unit(s) to help operating unit(s)
 Standby unit requires a 100% call from the Lead (#1) unit before turning on
 Standby unit waits for an alarm or additional requirement
 Lead (#1) unit defines proportional band according to available units
 Cascaded units are not included in the calculation of the average
temperature and/or humidity readings
Programmable Cascade Settings

Cascade Cooling / Heating and
Yes
Humidification / Dehumidification
Cascade for Cooling and Heating Cool / Heat
Cascade for Cooling only Cooling
Preparations for Networking

Before connecting the units in a network group the technician needs to:
 Make a map the room indicating the location of all heat generating devices
and air conditioning units
 Determine which air conditioning units are to be networked together as a
group to ensure proper airflow and environmental control for the zone,
maximum of 32 units in a group
 Determine if multiple groups are to be used, maximum of 99 groups
 Determine if the networked group will have standby units
 Is Teamwork Mode going to be used, if yes which one
 Read and record all programmed settings in all of the single units
 Determine who will provide the networking cables and switch
70
Things to understand - Default Settings and Ranges:

To configure the iCOM controlled unit for networking, the technician needs to
understand the following:
 IP Address (Internet Protocol Address): a unique address assigned to
each system view (large display) and each unit view (control board) within
the networked group. DO NOT duplicate any IP Address within the
networked group of units.
 U2U Address (Unit-2-Unit Address): a unique address assigned to each
system (large display) and each unit view (control board) within the
networked group to define the number of computers within the group and
the order of operation. The unit defined as the lead must have the system
view (large display) indentified as U2U #33 and unit view (control board) as
U2U #1. The U2U Addresses for each device must be consecutive starting
at #33 for the system view (large display) and at #1 for the unit view (control
board). DO NOT duplicate any U2U Address within the networked group of
units.
 U2U Group (Unit-2-Unit Group Address): used to separate networked
groups using the same switch so different teamwork operational modes can
be utilized. All U2U Group Addresses must be the same within each
network group.
 System View (Large Display) Default Settings:
– Number of Connected Units: 1 (range is 1 – 32, only change when
networking
– IP Address: 192.168.254.003 (only change when networking)
– U2U Address: 33 (range is 33 – 64, only change when networking)
– U2U Group: 1 (range is 1 – 99, only change when networking)
 Unit View (Control Board) Default Settings:

– IP Address: 192.168.254.001 (only change when networking)
– U2U Address: 1 (range is 1 – 32, only change when networking)
– U2U Group: 1 (range is 1 – 99, only change when networking)
 Teamwork Modes:
– No (default) choices are 1 or 2 or 3
Networking Switch Minimum Network Switch Requirements:

 IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u
 10/100 Mbps speed
 Multiple RJ-45 ports – one shared RJ45 uplink
71
iCOM Network Setup Process

Steps the technician is to perform before networking the units into a group:
1. Define the control programs to be used:

 Teamwork Mode
 Running and Standby, rotation day and time
2. Review the room layout map identifying the units to be networked together
and document for each unit the following items:
 the U2U Group Address for each control board and large display
 the U2U Address for each control board and large display
 the IP Address for each control board and large display
3. Determine the number of switches to be used in the network and power
source for each switch.
4. Determine the total number of and the length of each Cat 5E or greater
straight patch cable to be used in the network group, remember the
maximum length of any networking cable is 328 feet (100 m) when using a
powered switch.
5. Make a network wiring connection map showing each cable that will to be
routed between the switch and each unit control board and large display,
list the length of each cable. Label each cable for identification purposes.
6. Before networking program each unit control board and large display to the
proper IP address, U2U Address and U2U Group Address as documented
Step 1 above, Remember to properly save the Unit View (control board)
first and the System View (large display) second. If these program changes
are not properly saved the network will not work correctly.
7. If necessary attach an identifying label to each unit in the networked group
based on the U2U address of the unit control board.
8. Before networking program each unit to the required operational parameter
values and properly save these changes.
72
Networking the Units into a Group

1. Install and power the network switch, if using the customers switch identify
and mark the ports to be used.
2. Test the networking cables before and after routing between the switch
ports and large display and control board of each unit to verify they are not
damaged. Label each end of the cables and if possible rout a couple of
spare cables.
3. Connect unit #1 large display and control board to the switch and verify they
are communicating by accessing the User Menu screen and then selecting
the View Network icon. If not communicating find and correct the problem.
4. Connect unit #2 large display and control board to the switch and verify they
are communicating. Continue this process until all of the large displays and
unit control boards connected to the switch and are all communicating.
73
Networking Units with Small Displays

1. Only two units with small displays can be networked together.
2. Before networking the units together, each unit view (control board) must be
programmed with a different IP Address and U2U Address, but must have
the same U2U Group Address. Once the addresses are changed the
service technician must perform a unit view (control board) Bootloader Save
and Reboot function to save the changes.
3. The units are now ready to be networked by installing a CAT 5E or greater
crossover cable between the Ethernet ports on the unit control boards. The
maximum cable length is 328 feet (100 meters).
4. Units with small displays cannot operate in any Teamwork mode. The only
communications between the units is Lead / Lag (Running / Standby)
operation. If programmed for lead / lag the units will rotate on either an
alarm condition or at a programmed time. The service technician must
program the rotation increment as daily, weekly or monthly and time of day
the rotation is to occur.
5. The small display can only be used to program or view the control board it
is directly connected to using the CAN (controller area network) cable.
Networking 2 Units with Small Displays

CAT5E or greater crossover - cable connected to the
Ethernet port on each control board
Unit No. 1 Unit No. 2

Unit View (Control Board) Unit View (Control Board)
Menu Unit No. 1 Menu Unit No. 2
Line Line
S802 # Units: 2 S802 # Units: 2
S803 Teamwork: No S803 Teamwork: No
S836 IP: 192.168.254.001 S836 IP: 192.168.254.002
S841 U2U Address: 1 S841 U2U Address: 2
S842 U2U Group: 1 S842 U2U Group: 1
74
Networking Units with Large Displays

1. A maximum of 32 units can be networked into a group as long as there is at
least one large display.
2. Before networking the units each system view (large display) and each unit
view (control board) must be programmed with a different IP Address and
U2U Address, but must have the same U2U Group Address. Once the
addresses are changed the service technician must first perform a unit view
(control board) Bootloader Save and Reboot function and then secondly
must perform a system view (large display) Bootloader Save and Reboot
function to save the changes to each computer.
3. Networking is accomplished by installing a CAT 5E or greater straight
through (patch) cable between the powered switch and each large display
and each control board. The maximum cable length is 328 feet (100
meters).
Networking 2 Units with Large Displays and a Switch
Powered
Switch
CAT5E or greater straight

(patch) cables

System View (Large Display) System View (Large Display)
Menu Menu
Line Line
S802 # Units: 2 S802 # Units: 2
S803 Teamwork: No, 1, 2 or 3 S803 Teamwork: No, 1, 2 or 3
S813 IP: 192.168.254.033 S813 IP: 192.168.254.034
Unit View (Control Board) Unit View (Control Board)

Menu Unit No. 1 Menu Unit No. 2
Line Line
S836 IP: 192.168.254.001 S836 IP: 192.168.254.002
75
Sample Multiple Unit Network Setup Table
Number of Connected
Units
Menu Line S802 = 10
Unit View (Control Board) System View (Large Display)

Unit #1: IP Address 192.168.254.001 192.168.254.033
U2U Address 1 33
U2U Group Address 1 1
Unit #2: IP Address 192.168.254.002 192.168.254.034
U2U Address 2 34
Unit #3: IP Address 192.168.254.003 192.168.254.035
U2U Address 3 35
Unit #4: IP Address 192.168.254.004 192.168.254.036
U2U Address 4 36
Unit #5: IP Address 192.168.254.005 192.168.254.037
U2U Address 5 37
Unit #6: IP Address 192.168.254.006 192.168.254.038
U2U Address 6 38
Unit #7: IP Address 192.168.254.007 192.168.254.039
U2U Address 7 39
Unit #8: IP Address 192.168.254.008 192.168.254.040
U2U Address 8 40
Unit #9: IP Address 192.168.254.009 192.168.254.041
U2U Address 9 41
Unit #10: IP Address 192.168.254.010 192.168.254.042
U2U Address 10 42
76
Blank Multiple Unit Network Setup Table

Number of
Connected Units:
Menu Line S802
Unit View (Control Board) System View (Large Display)

Unit #1: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #2: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #3: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #4: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #5: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #6: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #7: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #8: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #9: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
Unit #10: IP Address
U2U Address
U2U Group Address
77
Notes:
78
Chapter 2
Programming Functions
 iCOM Display Components and Functions
 iCOM Key Pad Descriptions
 iCOM Display Symbols and Icons
 Unit Display Screen Views
 Menu Screens and Icons
 Navigating and Accessing the Display Main and Sub Menus
 Where and When to Save
 Entering a Password
 User Menu Parameters
 Service Menu Parameters
 Advance Menu Parameters
79
The standard iCOM control is supplied with a front panel mounted small display
screen which features a 128 x 64 dot matrix graphics. The display provides both
descriptive text readouts and two (2) menu icons. The optional large display
screen features a 320 x 240 dot matrix graphic display that shows user and
service icons as well as descriptive text and graphics. The information provided
visually on either of these displays are room temperature and humidity,
temperature and humidity set points, alarm status and settings, event histories and
the current time. All programming functions will be done through the supplied
display.
Small Display with

Panel Mounted Bezel
Large Display with

Panel Mounted Bezel
80
iCOM Display Components and Functions

The keypad functions and LEDs are identical on both the Small and Large
displays. The large display is shown for reference.
Liquid Crystal display
LED Status Indicators

Top LED is red or flashing red - alarm,
Bottom LED is amber (power on) or green (unit on) Keypad
iCOM Keypad Layout:
The iCOM control screen displays text and icons for monitoring and programming
your Liebert unit and/ or network of units. The number of icons and the amount of
text shown depends upon the display type supplied on your unit. From the default
menu, the user menu may be accessed by pressing the enter key. When the user
selects an icon the various submenus, set points, status, thresholds and service
information is displayed. The following defines the various keyboard icons and
functions.
81
iCOM Keypad Descriptions:
82
iCOM Display Symbols and Icons
Large Display Unit 1 Graphic View Defined
The iCOM programming functions are separated into three (3) basic menus:
 User Menu
 Service Menu
 Advanced Menu
When the desired icon has been selected, press the enter key. If the selected
menu item has submenus, they are now revealed. If there are no submenus, the
function or setting or command level text is displayed. User and Service menu
settings are readable without a password, changing the programmed values
requires a password. When a password is required to perform a programming
function, the iCOM displays a password prompt. Advanced menu setting requires
a password to read and program.
83
Unit Display Screen Views

Unit Displays
The Large and Small unit display screens have the ability to present information in
two different formats:
Graphic’s View: shows all of the unit operational icon symbols with a bar graph
(even if the operation is disabled or the optional component is not in the unit). The
bar graph is highlighted when the function is operational and indicates the
operating percentage.
Simple View: shows the unit operational icon symbol only when the function is
operational. This screen selection eliminates the bar graph offering a less busy
display. The large display will still show the operating percentage while the small
display does not.
If Graphics Comma or Simple Comma is selected in the display setup parameters

decimal points will be displayed on some of the screens. The end user can also
select from dark background with light text or light background with dark text.
The small display screen allows access for reading or programming all parameters
that apply to a stand-a-lone unit. Below are samples of the small display graphics
and simple screens.
Small Display Graphic View

Unit 1
Small Display Simple View
Unit 1
84
The large display screen allows the same access as the small display but also
indicates the date, time, unit status, last two events that have occurred at the unit
and provides basic navigation help and the main screens.
Additionally the large display provides access to all unit control boards when
networked into a group of units. The system view screen(s) will display the group
averages when displaying operating functions and temperature - humidity
readings. The individual unit view screens will display the specific unit operating
information. Below are samples of the large display system and units graphics
and simple screens.
System Graphic View
System Simple View
85
System Rack View
Unit Graphics View
Unit Graphics View
86
Menu Screens and Icons
Menu Parameters Names

Level 1: User Menus Level 2: Service Menus Level 3: Advanced Menus
password required to password required to change password required to
change program program change program
Set Points Set Points Factory Settings
Spare Parts List Unit Diary Expert Settings
Events Log: read only Standby Settings / Lead-Lag Compressor Info
Graphics Wellness / Maintenance Settings Tandem Compressor Info
View Network Diagnostics / Service Mode Motorized Ball Valve Settings
Set Alarms Set Alarms Access
Sensor Data iCOM – DO Setup Runtime Monitoring
Active Alarms Sensor Calibration / Setup Event Override
Display Setup Economizer Global Condenser
Total Run Hours System / Network Setup Electronic Expansion Valve
Sleep Mode Options Setup Condenser Control
Service Contact Info Service Contact Info
Condenser Timer Remote Sensors
87
Parameter Codes
All parameters will have a parameter code on the left side of the page. This
parameter code is the assignment number in the Menu. The code indicates the
menu and parameter item being accessed. Example: U401 means “USER MENU
parameter item 401. This code is as an excellent communication tool when talking
to someone about the parameter (especially if their screen is in a different
language).
Navigating and Accessing Sub-Menus for Large Displays

To navigate and access any parameter when in the MENU screens press the
ENTER key, this highlight the icon in the upper left hand corner of the menu
screen. If this is the sub-menu you want to access press the ENTER key again.
The parameter pages will now appear for the sub-menu. Press the ESCAPE key
to return to the previous screen.
If you want to access another sub-menu icon use the arrow keys to move to your
choice and then press the enter key to access. Continue pressing the ESCAPE
key until the display returns to the System Status Screen.
Navigating and Accessing Sub-Menus for Small Displays

To navigate and access any parameter when in the MENU screens press the
ENTER key. This will highlight the Password Level. Pressing the DOWN arrow
key will let you navigate the sub-menus.
Press the ENTER key on the sub-menu you want to access. The parameter
pages will now appear for the sub-menu. Press the ESCAPE key to return to the
previous screen. If you want to access another sub-menu icon use the arrow keys
to move to your choice and then press the enter key to access.
Continue pressing the ESCAPE key until the display returns to the Unit Status
Screen.
Navigating and Accessing Parameters for Programming when in the

Sub-Menu Screens
In the selected menu screen press the ENTER key to select the parameter to be
viewed. The parameter will become high-lighted. Press the ENTER key again to
access the value for the parameter. Use the UP and Down keys to change the
value. Press the ENTER key to accept the change. Press the ESCAPE key to
abort the change. All parameter changes require a password to be entered.
88
Where and When to Save

Small Display parameters are shown in CAPITAL LETTERS and Large Display
parameters are shown in (Parenthesis). Any parameter program change requires
the technician to perform a CS CTRL (Configuration Safe) operation at the control
board and / or large display. The NW CTRL (Network Safe) function only applies if
changing the “UNIT” name. A BL CTRL (Bootloader Variables) save and reboot
operation is only performed when re-programming the unit for networking.
Saving Changes to the Control Board

Using Small Menu
Using Large Display Menu Location
Display Line
(Configuration Safe) CS CTRL Network Menu/Unit View (PG 1) S831
(Network Safe) NW CTRL Network Menu/Unit View (PG 1) S832
(Bootloader Variables) BL CTRL Network Menu/Unit View (PG 2) S843
Saving changes to the Large Display

Save Parameters Menu Location Menu Line
(Configuration Safe) Network Menu/System View (PG 1) S809
(Network Safe) Network Menu/System View (PG 1) S810
(Bootloader Variables) Network Menu/System View (PG 2) S821
Entering a Password
To enter a password to change a parameter press the ENTER key. Password will
be highlighted. Press the ENTER key a second time. This will move the highlight
to the first numeral of the password. Press the UP arrow key to select the
appropriate number. Once you have your first number entered press the RIGHT
arrow key to the second numeral. Use the UP arrow key to select the number.
Once you have the second number entered press the RIGHT arrow key to the
third numeral. Use the UP arrow key to select the number. Once the third number
is entered, press the ENTER key. Your Actual Password Level will be displayed in
the parentheses.
Passwords
Passwords Access Level

1490 Allows changes in the User Menu
5010 Allows changes in the User Menu and Service Menu

Note: The fourth digit in the password is not used.
89
Menu Parameters (Software Version PA2)

USER MENU Parameters - Password: 1490
Small Display parameters are shown in CAPITAL letters and Large Display
parameters are shown in (Parenthesis). Parameters may be System or Unit
and either Read only or Read / Write.
Set Point Parameters, page 1 of 2

Parameter
Menu
SMALL DISPLAY Default Range
Line
(Large Display)
U101 (Password) - -
TEMP SET / TEMP ACT RET 73°F (23.0°C) SET 41 - 104°F
U102 (Temperature Set Point REM 73°F (23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C) / ACT 32 -
Act / Set) SUP 66°F (18.9°C) 113°F (0.0 – 45.0°C)
TEMPSENS RET, REM, SUP (Return
U103 (Temperature Control RET (Return Sensor) Sensor, Remote Sensor,
Sensor) Supply Sensor)
HUM SET (Humidity Set 50% PRED (51°F / 20 - 80% (41 - 65°F / 5.0 –
U104
Point) 8.9°C DEWP) 18.3°C Dew Point)
HUM SENS (Humidity RET, REM (Return Sensor,
U105 RET (Return Sensor)
Control Sensor) Remote Sensor)
REL, COMP, PRED, DEWP
HUM CTRL (Humidity
U106 PRED (Predictive) (Relative, Compensated,
Control Type)
Predictive, Dew Point)
U107 FAN SET (Fan Set Point) 73°F (23.0°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
RET, REM, SUP, MAN,
FAN SENS (Fan Control (Return Sensor, Remote
U108 RET (Return Sensor)
Sensor) Sensor, Supply Sensor,
Manual
SMART AI (Smart Aisle
U110 NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
Enable)
Note: If parameter U103 is set to either Remote or Supply Sensor, parameter

U106 defaults to Dew Point control. Parameter U106 can be re-programmed to
Relative, Compensated or Predictive control.
90
USER MENU’s Continued

Set Point Parameters, page 2 of 2
Menu Parameter
Default Range
Line SMALL DISPLAY (Large Display)
U112 (Password) - -
73°F 41 - 104°F
U113 2nd SETP (2nd Temperature Set Point)
(23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C)
41°F 41 - 81°F
U114 SUP TEMP (Supply Temp Limit Set point)
(5.0°C) (5.0 – 27.0°C)
73°F 41 - 104°F
U116 BACK TSP (BMS Backup Temp Set Point)
(23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C)
73°F 41 - 104°F
U117 BACK FAN (BMS Backup Fan Set Point)
(23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C)
RCOMP SP (Return Compensated Set 73°F 41 - 104°F
U119
Point) (23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C)
Parameter Descriptions
U107 Fan Setpoint: Value must be set whenever the Fan Control Sensor is
different from the Temperature Control Sensor.
Fan Control Sensor: Determines which sensor will control the variable
U108
fan speed. This parameter works in conjunction with the Fan Setpoint.
2nd Temperature Setpoint: Uses a customer input (RAD1 – 4) change of
U113
state to change the temperature set point that will be used by the control.
Supply Temp Limit Setpoint: Selects the unit minimum discharge air
U114 temperature value, will reduce the unit cooling capacity to not drop below
this value.
BMS Backup Temp Setpoint: Selects the unit temperature setpoint value
U116 in the event of a BMS time out (loss of communications). Parameter
must be configured to activate.
BMS Backup Fan Setpoint: Selects the fan temperature setpoint value in
U117 the event of a BMS time out (loss of communications). Parameter must
be configured to activate.
Return Compensation Setpoint: Adjusts the temperature setpoint to
ensure the return air temperature is kept above the parameter setpoint.
U119
Allows the return sensor to over-ride the optional Supply or Remote
temperature control when configured.
Spare Parts List – Read Only Large Display only

Displays the various part number and description of
the components / parts factory supplied in the unit.
Event Log – Read Only

Stores and displays the last 400 events that have occurred at the unit.
91

Graphics Parameters
Parameter
Default Range
SMALL DISPLAY (Large Display)
(System Cooling Control Temperature Graph
11°F (6°C) 5 - 36°F (3 - 20°C)
Height)
8, 32, 60 minutes
(System Cooling Control Temperature Time
24 Hours 12, 24 hours
Scale)
2, 4, 8, 16 days
(System Control Humidity Graph Height) 25% 10 – 30%
8, 32, 60 minutes
(System Control Humidity Time Scale) 24 Hours 12, 24 hours
2, 4, 8, 16 days
(System Fan Control Temperature Graph Height) 11°F (6°C) 5 - 36°F (3 - 20°C)
8, 32, 60 minutes
(System Fan Control Temperature Time Scale) 24 Hours 12, 24 hours
2, 4, 8, 16 days
(System Dew Point Temperature Graph Height) 11°F (6°C) 5 - 36°F (3 - 20°C)
8, 32, 60 minutes
(System Dew Point Temperature Time Scale) 24 Hours 12, 24 hours
2, 4, 8, 16 days
COOL CTRL TEMP 5 - 36°F
11°F (6°C)
(Unit Cooling Control Temperature Graph Height) (3 - 20°C)
8, 32, 60 minutes
COOL CTRL TEMP
(Unit Cooling Control Temperature Time Scale)
2, 4, 8, 16 days
CTRL HUM (Unit Control Humidity Graph Height) 25% 10 – 30%
8, 32, 60 minutes
CTRL HUM (Unit Control Humidity Time Scale) 24 Hours 12, 24 hours
2, 4, 8, 16 days
FAN CTRL TEMP
11°F (6°C) 5 - 36°F (3 - 20°C)
(Unit Fan Control Temperature Graph Height)
8, 32, 60 minutes
FAN CTRL TEMP
(Unit Fan Control Temperature Time Scale)
2, 4, 8, 16 days
CONTROL DP (Unit Dew Point Temperature
11°F (6°C) 5 - 36°F (3 - 20°C)
Graph Height)
8, 32, 60 minutes
Control DP (Unit Dew Point Temperature Time
Scale)
2, 4, 8, 16 days
View Network Parameters (Large Display only) – Read Only

Allows the user to view the status of each unit connected in a network configuration:
Alarm Off, Manual, Local Off, Display Off, Alarm Standby, Standby, Timer Off,
Unit On, Warning On, Alarm On, Timer, Remote Off, Monitoring Off, Rem Backdraft,
Dis Backdraft, Loc Backdraft and BMS Backdraft.
92

Set Alarm Parameters, page 1 of 4
Menu Parameter
Default Range
U201 (Password) - -
YES YES, NO
U202 RTN SNSR (Return Sensor Alarms)
(Enabled) (Enabled, Disabled)
100°F 34 - 210°F
U203 HI TEMP (High Return Temperature)
(37.8°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
65°F 34 - 210°F
U204 LO TEMP (Low Return Temperature)
(18.3°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
U205 HI HUM (High Return Humidity) 65% 1.0 – 99.0%
U206 LOW HUM (Low Return Humidity) 35% 1.0 – 99.0%
NO NO, YES
U207 SENSOR A (Sensor A Alarms)
(Disabled) (Disabled, Enabled)
90°F 34 - 210°F
U208 HI TEMPA (High Temperature Sensor A)
(32.3°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
55°F 34 - 210°F
U209 LO TEMPA (Low Temperature Sensor A)
(12.8°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
U210 HI HUM A (High Humidity Sensor A) 70.0% 1.0 – 99.0%
U211 LO HUM A (Low Humidity Sensor A) 30.0% 1.0 – 99.0%

Menu Parameter
Default Range
U212 (Password) - -
NO, YES
U213 SUP SNSR (Supply Sensor Alarms) NO (Disabled)
(Disabled, Enabled)
34 - 210°F
U214 HI SUP T (High Supply Temperature) 75°F (23.9°C)
(1.0 - 99.0°C)
34 - 210°F
U215 LO SUP T (Low Supply Temperature) 50°F (10.0°C)
(1.0 - 99.0°C)
NO, YES
U219 REM SNSR (Remote Sensor Alarms) NO (Disabled)
(Disabled, Enabled)
HI REM / LO REM (High / Low 90°F (32.3°C) / 34 - 210°F
U220
Remote Temperature) 55°F (12.8°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
93

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
U223 (Password) - -
HIREM / LOREM 01 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U224
(High / Low Remote 01) 55°F (12.8°C) (1.0 - 99.0°C)
HIREM / LOREM 02 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U225
HIREM / LOREM 03 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U226
HIREM / LOREM 04 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U227
HIREM / LOREM 05 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U228
HIREM / LOREM 06 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U229
HIREM / LOREM 07 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U230
HIREM / LOREM 08 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U231
HIREM / LOREM 09 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U232
HIREM / LOREM 10 90°F (32.2°C) / 34 - 210°F
U233

Menu Parameter
Default Range
U234 (Password) - -
U235 STPR MSG (Static Pressure Messages) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
1.284 inWC 0.010 – 1.404 inWC
U236 HI STAT (High Static Pressure)
(320 Pa) (2 – 350 Pa)
0.000 inWC 0.000 – 1.395 inWC
U237 LO STAT (Low Static Pressure)
(000 Pa) (0 – 348 Pa)
U238 STAT OFF (SP Messages During Unit Off) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U239 STAT FAN (SP Messages On Fan Adjust) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
1.284 inWC 0.010 – 1.404 inWC
U240 HI RANG (SP Transducer High Range)
(320 Pa) (2 – 350 Pa)
0.000 inWC 0.000 – 1.395 inWC
U241 LO RANG (SP Transducer Low Range)
(000 Pa) (0 – 348 Pa)
94

Sensor Data Parameters, page 1 of 4– Read Only
Menu Parameter
Range
U301 TEMP A1T (Optional Sensor A1T) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U302 HUM A2H (Optional Sensor A2H ) 20 – 80%
U303 TEMP B1T / B2T (Optional Sensor B1T / B2T) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U304 HUM B2H (Optional Sensor B2H) 20 – 80%
TEMP C1T / C2T AMB TEMP (Optional
U305 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
Sensor C1T / C2T Outdoor Temperature)
HUM C2H AMB HUM (Optional Sensor C2H
U306 20 – 80%
Outdoor Humidity)
U307 FC TEMP (Freecooling Fluid Temperature) 4 - 113°F (-15.0 - 45.0°C)
FC STAT AMB TEMP (FC Status Outdoor OFF, START, ON (Off, Start,
U308
Temperature) On) 4 - 113°F (-15.0 - 45.0°C)
DS1 / DS2 TEMP
U309 84 - 308°F (29 - 153°C)
(DigiScroll 1 / 2 Temperature)
FS1 / FS2 TEMP (Fixed Scroll 1 / 2
U310 84 - 308°F (29 - 153°C)
Temperature)
U311 STATPRES (Static Pressure inWC / Pa) 0.000 – 9.999 inWC (Pa)
U312 SYSPRES (System Static Pressure inWC / Pa 0.000 – 9.999 inWC (Pa)
U31A AIRFLOW (Calculated Airflow CFM / m3h) CFM / m3h
Sensor Data Parameters, page 2 of 4 – Read Only

Menu Parameter
Range
U313 HI TEMP HMS (Daily High Temperature) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U314 LO TEMP HMS (Daily Low Temperature) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U315 HI HUMI HMS (Daily High Humidity) 20 – 80%
U316 LO HUMI HMS (Daily Low Humidity) 20 – 80%
U317 HI DEWP HMS (Daily High Dew Point) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U318 LO DEWP HMS (Daily Low Dew Point) 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
T: 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U320 THB T / H / DP (Return THB T / H / DP) H: 20 – 80%
DP: 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
T: 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
U321 S_A T / H / DP (Sensor A T / H / DP) H: 20 – 80%
DP: 32 - 122°F (0.0 - 50.0°C)
95

Menu Parameter
Range
U325 REM S 01 / 02 (Remote Sensor 1 / 2) 4 - 113°F (-25.0 – 125°C)
U331 REM CTRL (Rem Sensor Control is set to) AVG, MAX (Average, Maximum)
U332 NUM REM (# of Remote Control Sensors) 0 - 10
U333 REM AVG (Remote Sensor Unit Average) 4 - 113°F (-25.0 – 125°C)
U334 REM MAX (Remote Sensor Unit Maximum) 4 - 113°F (-25.0 – 125°C)
U335 SYS AVG (Remote Sensor System Average) 4 - 113°F (-25.0 – 125°C)
U336 SYS MAX (Remote Sensor System Maximum) 4 - 113°F (-25.0 – 125°C)

Parameter
Menu
SMALL DISPLAY Range
Line
(Large Display)
FACTORY STD., NOT CONFIG, NOT USED, AIR PRES
AN IN 1 (Analog 1 – 4, PRESS 1- 4, TEMP1 – 4, PERCENT 1 - 4
U337
Input 1) (Factory Std., Not Config., not used, Air Pres 1 - 4,
Pressure 1 – 4, Temp 1 - 4, Percent 1 – 4)
AN IN 2 (Analog
U338 See line U337 for displayed message choices
Input 2)
AN IN 3 (Analog
Input 3)
AN IN 4 (Analog
Input 4)
Note: The displayed information for Parameter lines U337 – U340 is programmed
in the Service Menu – Options Setup and will display information in one of the
following units of measure:
Temperature: °F, °C
Humidity: %RH
Pressure: Bar, PAS, PSI or inWG
Active Alarms – Read Only (Last Menu selection on Small Display)

Allows the end user Allows the user to view all active warning and alarm conditions.
96

Display Setup Parameters
Menu Parameter
Default Range
EN (English),
DEU (Deutsch),
ITA (Italiano),
FRE (French),
ESP (Espanol),
POR (Portugues),
CZE (Czech),
RUS (Russian),
U401 LANGUAGE (Language) EN (English)
CHI (Chinese Simp)
GRE (Greek),
SWE (Swedish),
TURK (Turkish),
HUN (Hungarian),
POL (Polski),
JAP (Japanese),
CHT (Chinese TRAD)
U402 YEAR/MONTH/ DAY (Date) MM/DD/ YY –
U403 HOUR/MIMUTE/ SECOND (Time) HH/MM/ SS –
U404 TEMP F/C (Temperature Indication) °C °C, °F
U405 CONTRAST (Display Contrast) 50% 0 – 100%
BUZ FREQ / BUZ TEST
U406 50% 0 – 100%
(Buzzer Frequency)
5, 10, 30 minutes
U407 BACKLITE (Backlite Off after) 5 min
1, 12 hr
GRAPH, SIMPL,
GRACO, SIMCO
SCREEN GRAPH
U408 (Graphical, Simple,
(Screen) (Graphical)
Graphical Comma,
Simple Comma)
U409 (Display Shows Data Of Unit) (All) (All or 1 – 32)
DISPLAY NORM NORM, INV (Normal,
U410
(Display Colors) (Normal) Inverted)
M/D/Y, D.M.Y, Y-M-D
DATE M/D/Y (mm/dd/yyyy
U411
(Date Format) (mm/dd/yyyy) dd.mm.yyyy
yyyy-mm-dd)
97

Total Run Hours Parameters
Parameter
Menu LIMIT (Limit
SMALL DISPLAY
Line Range Hr)
(Large Display)
U501 (Actual Hours) LIMIT (Limit)
U502 MOTOR(S) (Fan Motors) - 0 - 32000
U503 COMP1 (Compressor 1B / 1A) - 0 - 32000
U504 COMP2 (Compressor 2B / 2A) - 0 - 32000
U505 CW (Chilled Water) - 0 - 32000
U506 FC (Free Cool) - 0 - 32000
U507 HG / HW (HotGas / HotWater) - 0 - 32000
U508 EL HEAT1 (Electric Heater 1) - 0 - 32000
U511 HUM (Humidifier) - 0 - 32000
U512 DEHUM (Dehumidification) - 0 - 32000
Sleep Mode Parameters

Menu Parameter
Default Range
U601 (PASSWORD) - -
U602 SLEEP EN (Sleep Mode Enabled)) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
(Sleep On: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu,
Fri, Sat, Sun)
MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT,
SUN (No)
U605 (Sleep Everyday 1) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U606 START 1 / STOP 1 (From / To) 00:00 / 00:00 TIME (hh:mm)
U607 (Sleep Everyday 2) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U608 START 2 / STOP 2 (From / To) 00:00 / 00:00 TIME (hh:mm)
U609 TIME MOD (Timer Mode) YES (Yes) NO, YES, AUTO (No, Yes, Auto)
S.OFF S.OFF, DEADB (System Off,
U610 TIME TYP (Timer Mode Type)
(System Off) Dead Band)
U611 DEADBAND (DeadBand) 4°F (2.3°K) 4 - 27°F (2.0 – 15.0°K)
Whenever the temperature / humidity alarm trip points are reached Sleep Mode
will be interrupted and the unit will operate based on its programmed parameters.
98

Service Contact Parameters – Read Only
Parameter
Menu
SMALL DISPLAY Range
Line
(Large Display)
U703 LINE 1(Line 1) Text - String
U704 LINE 2 (Line 2) Text - String
Condenser Timer Parameters, page 1 of 2

Menu Parameter
Default Range
U801 (PASSWORD) - -
U802 (Low Noise Timer Enabled) (No) (No, Yes)
U803 (Noise Reduction On) (No) (No, Yes)
(Whole Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu,
U804 (No) (No, Yes)
Fri, Sat, Sun)
(Interval Days: Mon, Tue, Wed,
U805 (No) (No, Yes)
Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun)
U806 (Interval From / To) (00:00 / 00:00) (hh:mm)
(Inactive, Active Interval,
U807 (Operating Mode L / H) (Inactive)
Active Whole Day)
Condenser Timer Parameters, page 2 of 2

Menu Parameter
Default Range
U812 (PASSWORD) - -
U813 (Select Condenser 2) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U814 (Fan Reversal Every x Days) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U815 (Reverse Fan At) 00:00 / 00:00 TIME (hh:mm)
U816 (Reversal Duration) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U817 (Reverse Fans Now) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U818 (Max Speed at OpMode 0 LN) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U819 (Max Speed at OpMode 100 LN) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
U820 (Current Max Speed) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
If parameter U813 is set to Yes, both Condenser Timer screens repeat for
Condenser 2 setup.
99
SERVICE MENU Parameters – Password: 5010

Small Display parameters are shown below in CAPITAL letters and Large
Display parameters are shown in (Parenthesis). Parameters may be System
or Unit and either Read only or Read / Write.
Set Point Parameters – Temperature Control, page 1 of 9

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S101 (Password) - -
RET, REM, SUP (Return
TEMPSENS (Temperature RET (Return
S102 Sensor, Remote Sensor,
Control Sensor) Sensor)
Supply Sensor)
TEMP SET / TEMP ACT RET 73°F (23.0°C) SET 41 - 104°F
S103 (Temperature Set point Act / REM 73°F (23.0°C) (5.0 – 40.0°C) / ACT 32 -
Set) SUP 66°F (18.9°C) 113°F (0.0 – 45.0°C)
INTEL, PI, PROP,
CTRL TYP
S104 PI (PI) (Intelligent, PI,
(Temperature Control Type)
Proportional)
RET 12°F (6.7°K) 4 – 200°F / 0.0 – 15 min
TEMP PB / TEMP INT (Temp
S106 REM 16°F (8.9°K) (2.0 - 111°K / 0.0 – 15
Proportional / Integral)
SUP 16°F (8.9°K) min)
S108 AUTOSET (Autoset Enable) YES (Yes) YES, NO, (No, Yes)
TEMP DB (Temperature
S109 2°F (1.1°C) 0 - 36°F (0.0 – 20.0°C)
DeadBand)
SUPSENS / SUP TEMP NO, YES (No, Yes)
S110 (Supply Limit Enabled/Set NO (No) Yes: Default 41°F (5.0C)
point) 41 - 81°F (5.0 – 27.0°C)
S111 HEAT DB (Heater Deadband) 0°F (0.0°C) 0 - 36°F (0.0 – 20.0°C)
Note: Parameter line S108 Autoset Enable is automatically disabled when

parameter S102 is set to Remote Sensor or Supply Sensor.
100
SERVICE MENU’s Continued

Set Point Parameters – Temperature Control, page 2 of 9
Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S112 (Password) - -
NO, RET, SUP, R+S
COMP EN (Enable Temp
S113 NO (No) (No, Return Sensor, Supply
Compensation)
Sensor, Ret + Sup Sensor)
RCOMP SP (Return
S114 73°F (23.0°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Compensation Set point)
RCOMP PB / RET CO
S115 (Return Compensation 0°F (0.0°C) 0 - 18°F (0.0 - 10.0°K)
Band/Value)
SUP CO (Supply
S116 0°F (0.0°C) 0 - 18°F (0.0 - 10.0°K)
Compensation Value)
CO FO / CO F100
S118 (Comp Cap Filter at 0 – 0.60% / 4.00% 0.01 – 100% / sec
100%)
TRANS CH (Capacity
S119 4.00% 0.01 – 100% / sec
Transition Filter)
CW FO / CW F100 (CW
S120 See note 0.01 – 100% / sec
Cap Filter at 0 – 100%)
BACK TSP (BMS
S121 73°F (23.0°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Backup Temp Setpoint)
2ND SETP (2nd
S122 73°F (23.0°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Temperature Setpoint)
Note: Parameter line S120 Filter Percent is determined by the program

selections on lines S102 – Temperature Control Sensor and S104 – Temperature
Control Type see the table below:
Menu Line S102

Supply Remote Return
Menu Line S104 Sensor Sensor Sensor
Proportional 0.06 sec 0.06 sec 0.1 sec

PI 0.06 sec 0.06 sec 0.1 sec
Intelligent 0.6 sec 0.6 sec 0.6 sec
101

Set Point Parameters – Humidity Control, page 3 of 9
Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S123 (Password) - -
HUM SENS (Humidity RET RET, REM (Return

S124
Control Sensor) (Return Sensor) Sensor, Remote Sensor)
PRED: 50%, 20 - 80% Predictive,
HUM SET (Humidity Set
S125 DEWP: 51°F / 41 - 86°F (5.0 - 30.0°C
point)
(10.3°C) Dew Point)
REL, COMP, PRED,
DEWP / RET, SUP
PRED / RET
HUM CTRL / HUM MODE (Relative, Compensated,
S126 (Predictive / Return
(Humidity Control Type) Predictive, Dew Point /
Sensor)
Return Sensor, Supply
Sensor)
HUM PB (Humidity 10.0%, / 1.0 – 50.0%,
S127
Proportional Band) 4°F (2.2°K DEWP) 2 - 18°F (1.1 – 10.0°K)
HUM INT (Humidity
S128 0.1 min 0.0 – 25.0 min
Integration Time)
0.0 – 50.0% Predictive,
HUM DB (Humidity 10.0% PRED,
S129 0 - 18°F (0.0 – 10.0°K Dew
Deadband) 4°F (2.2°K DEWP)
Point)
SUP, RET (Supply Sensor,
DEHUSET DEH ACT SUP 54°F (12.2°C)
S130 Return Sensor),
(Dehum Temp Setpoint) RET 73°F (23.0°C)
41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
DEH ADJ / DEH FIL (D- 9°F (5.0°K) / 0 - 18°F (0.0 - 10.0°K) /
S131
Setpoint Adjust / Filter) 5 sec 1 - 9 sec
LL SENS LL SET SUP, REM, RET (Supply
S132 (Dehum/Heat Low Limit RET (Return Sensor) Sensor, Remote Sensor,
Sensor) Return Sensor)
LO LIM 1 / LO LMT 2 LL1: - 5°F (2.5°K) -30 to -2°F
S133
(Dehum/Heat LL1 / LL2) LL2: -7°F (3.9°K) (-16.7 to -1.1°K)
DEHSUPB (Dehum Reheat
S13A 14°F (7.8°C) 2 - 54°F (2.0 - 30.0°C)
Prop Band)
ESTD AIS (Estimated Aisle
S13B 75°F (23.9°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Temp)
Note: Menu line S133 – Dehum / Heat LL1 / LL2 controls Compressor 1 / 2 during
dehumidification. If the air temperature decreases to LL1 value Compressor #1
will stop until the return air temperature increases above this value. LL2 is the
same function for Compressor 2 during dehumidification.
Menu line S13B – Estimated temperature used to determine humidity instead of

actual cold aisle temperature whenever the humidity control sensor is set to
remote and no remote sensors are installed.
102

Set Point Parameters – Free Cooling Control, page 4 of 9
Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S134 (Password) - -
AMB TYPE (DT1 Room / TMP NO, CONT, EFC, TMP, SET,
S135
Outdoor Type) (Temp) (Disabled, Contact, EFC, Temp, Set)
AMB DT (DT1 Room / Outdoor 8°F
S136 2 - 72°F (1.0 – 40.0°K)
Value) (5.0°K)
FC TYPE (DT2 Room / FC NO NO, CONT, TMP, SET, (Disabled,
S137
Fluid Type) (Disabled) Contact, Temp, Set)
FC DT (DT2 Room / FC Fluid 12°F
S138 0 - 36°F (0.0 – 20.0°K)
Value) (6.7°K)
NO
S139 MIN CW (Minimum CW Temp) NO, YES (Disabled, Enabled)
(Disabled)
MIN CW (Minimum CW Temp 45°F
S140 32 - 68°F (0.0 – 20.0°C)
Value) (7.0°C)
LOCK FC (Lockout FC at FC 32°F
S141 5 - 50°F (-15.0 – +10.0°C)
Fluid below) (0.0°C)
Set Point Parameters – Fan Control, page 5 of 9

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S145 (Password) - -
RET, SUP, REM, MAN (Return
FAN SENS (Fan Control RET (Return
S146 Sensor, Supply Sensor,
Sensor) Sensor)
Remote Sensor, Manual)
S147 FAN SET (Fan Setpoint) 73°F (22.8°C) 41- 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
FCTL TYP (Fan Temp Control
S148 PI (PI) PI, PROP (PI, Proportional)
Type)
FTEMP PB / FTEMPINT (Fan 36°F (20.0°K) / 4- 200°F (2.0 – 111.0°K) /
S149
Temp Prop / Integral) 1.0 MIN 0.0 – 15.0 Minutes
S150 FAN DB (Fan Deadband) 1°F (0.6°K) 0- 36°F (0.0 - 20.0°K)
S151 AIR CAL (Airflow Calibration) 10.0V 3.0 – 10.0VDC
VSD MIN / VSD SET CW: 60% / DX:
S152 CW / DX: 0 – 100% / 0 – 100%
(Fanspeed MIN / STD) 70% / 100%
VSD DEH / VSD NOP CW: 60% / DX:
S153 CW / DX: 0 – 100% / 0 – 100%
(Fanspeed Dehum / No Power) 70% / 100%
FAN + CO (Allow Fan
S154 YES (Enabled) NO, YES (Enabled, Disabled)
Modulation on Comp)
RETLIMEN (High Return Limit LOC, NO, TEAM (Local,
S155 LOC (Local)
Enable) Disabled, Team)
HIRETLIM (High Return
S15A 85°F (29.4°C) 41- 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Temperature Limit)
RETLIMPB
S15B 20°F (11.1°K) 0- 36°F (0.2 - 20.0°K)
(Return Limit P-Band)
103

Set Point Parameters - Fan Control, page 6 of 9
Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S156 (Password) - -
FF0% / FF100% (Fanspeed 0.20%/s –
S158 0.01 – 100.0%/s
Filter at 0 – 100) 1.00%/s
TRANS CH (Fanspeed
S159 1.00%/s 0.5 – 100.0%/s
Transition Filter)
FRM / FRD (Fanspeed DECEL / 0 SEC DECEL, BOTH (Decel, Both)
S160
Reposition Mode / Delay) (Decel / 0 Sec) / 0 – 300 Seconds
FF DEC (Max Deceleration
S161 0.10%/s 0.01 – 100.0%/s
Rate)
BACK FAN (BMS Backup
S162 73°F (23.0°C) 41 - 104°F (5.0 - 40.0°C)
Fan Setpoint)
NO, STD, COUPL B SET
BACK DRV (BMS Backup
S163 NO (No) (No, STD Speed, Coupled
Fan Operation)
Backup Set)
FAN BMS (Allow BMS to
S164 YES (Yes) YES, NO (Yes, No)
change Fanspeed)
F ST TIM / F ST SPD (Fan
S165 3 sec / 100% 0 – 600 seconds / 0 – 100%
Startup Time / Speed)
HTL APP (High Temp Limit NO, RET, SUP (No, Return,
S166 RET (Return)
Approach) Supply)
HTL AT (High Temp Limit
S16A 2°F (1.1°K) 0.0 - 10°F (0.0 – 5.5°K)
Approach At)
FC RAMP (FC / AirEco Ramp
S16B NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
Up w /CFC)
Set Point Parameters – Fan Back Draft Damper Contol, page 7 of 9

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S167 (Password) - -
BACKDRFT (Fan Back Draft NO
S168 NO, YES (Disabled, Enabled)
Control) (Disabled)
VSD BDR (VSD Setpoint BACK
S169 1.5V 0.1 – 5.1V
DRAFT)
S171 NO BDR 1 (Not Selectable Zone 1) 3.5V / 4.9V 0.0 – 5.0V
S172 NO BDR 2 (Not Selectable Zone 2) 0.0V / 0.0V 0.0 – 5.0V
BDR SOFF (Stop BDR When
S173 NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
System is Off)
S175 DISP BDR (Display Off and BDR) OFF (Off) OFF, BDR (Off, BackDraft)
S176 BMS BDR (BMS Off and BDR) OFF (Off) OFF, BDR (Off, BackDraft)
S177 LOC BDR (LOC Off and BDR) OFF (Off) OFF, BDR (Off, BackDraft)
104

Set Point Parameters – SCR Control, page 8 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S178 (Password) - -
Std STD, TIGHT
S179 CTRLTYPE (SCR Control Type)
(Standard) (Standard, Tight)
S180 C01 ON (Start 1st Compressor At) 0% -100 to +100%
S181 C01 OFF (Stop 1st Compressor At) -200% -200 to +50%
st
S182 C01 TD (1 Compressor Stop delay) 20 min 0 – 30 minutes
nd
S183 C02 ON (Start 2 Compressor At) 100% -100 to +100%
nd
S184 C02 OFF (Stop 2 Compressor At) 0% -200 to +50%
nd
S185 C02 TD (2 Compressor Stop Delay) 0 min 0 – 30 minutes
S186 CYCLET (Cycle Time) 1 sec 1.0 – 200.0 seconds
S187 SCRFACT (SCR Factor) 1.0 1.0 – 10.0
S188 ACT SCR (Actual SCR Request) - 0 – 100%
Supply Limit Enabled/Set point: On Chilled Water units supplied with the Supply
S110 Temperature Sensor selects the unit minimum discharge air temperature value,
will reduce the unit cooling capacity to not drop below this value.
Enable Temp Compensation: Allows multiple sensors to control cooling / heating
operation. Return Compensation can use either the supply or remote sensors.
S113
Supply Compensation can only be used if Smart Aisle is enabled with the remote
sensor for monitoring only.
BMS Backup Temp Set point: If enabled, selects the unit temperature set point
S121
value in the event of a BMS time out (loss of communications).
2nd Temperature Set point: Uses a customer input (RAD1 – 4) change of state to
S122
change the temperature set point that will be used by the control.
Dehum Temp Set point (Supply): On units supplied with the Supply Temperature
S132 Sensor sets the minimum supply air temperature during dehumidification to
prevent over cooling.
Fan Set point: Value must be set whenever the Fan Control Sensor is different
S147
from the Temperature Control Sensor.
High Return Temperature Limit: Sets the temperature at which the variable fan
S15A
speed will increase. Parameter S155 must be Enabled
BMS Backup Fan Set point: Selects the fan speed set point value in the event of
S162
a BMS time out (loss of communications). Parameter S163 must be Enabled
VDS Set point BACK DRAFT: Set as a voltage reference, will operate the EC
S169 Fans only at a minimum speed to prevent air re-circulating back into a standby
unit. Parameter S168 must be Enabled.
105

Set Point Parameters – Static Pressure Control, page 9 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S189 (Password) - -
STATPRES (Static Pressure Fan NO, LIMIT, CTRL
S190 NO (Disabled)
Control) (No, Limit, Control)
0.020 inWC 0.010 – 1.003 inWC
S191 STATSET (SP Setpoint)
(5 Pa) (2 – 250 Pa)
0.020 inWC 0.010 – 1.003 inWC
S192 STATDEAD (SP Deadband)
(5 Pa) (2 – 250 Pa)
PAUS MIM / PAUS MAX (SP Min / 2 – 180 seconds /
S193 30 sec / 60 sec
Max Pause) 2 – 15 seconds
S194 PULSE (SP Pulse inside DB) 3 sec 2 – 15 seconds
0.020 inWC 0.010 – 1.003 inWC
S195 SP PROP (SP Fanspeed P-Band)
(5 Pa) (2 – 250 Pa)
NO, YES (Disabled,
S196 SP DEH (SP During Dehum) NO (Disabled)
Enabled)
AVG, MIM (Average,
S197 SP TEAM (SP Teamwork Mode) AVG (Average)
Minimum)
SPSE AVG (SP Sensors in Avg for
S198 2 1 - 32
TW)
SP OFF SP OFF, FIX SP (SP
S199 SP FAIL (Operation @ Sensor Fail)
(SP Off) Off, Freeze Speed)
0.030 inWC 0.010 – 1.003 inWC
S19A SP UPPER (SP Upper Range)
(7.5 Pa) (2 – 250 Pa)
0.010 inWC 0.010 – 1.003 inWC
S19B SP LOWER (SP Lower Range)
(2.5 Pa) (0.0 – 247.5 Pa)
Unit Diary (Large Display only) – Read Only

Requires the Service Tool program to enter service and maintenance procedures
performed on the unit.
106

Standby Settings / Lead-Lag Parameters
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S501 (Password) - -
S502 #STANDBY (Number of Standby Units) 0 (0) 0 – 31
NO, DAILY, MON,
TUE, WED, THU, FRI,
SAT, SUN, M-MO,
M-TU, M-WE, M-TH,
M-FR, M-SA, M-SU
(No, Daily, Every
MON, Every TUE,
S503 ROTATION (Rotation Frequency) NO (No) Every WED, Every
THU, Every FRI,
Every SAT, Every
SUN, Monthly MON,
Monthly TUE, Monthly
WED, Monthly THU,
Monthly FRI, Monthly
SAT, Monthly SUN)
0 – 23 hour /
S504 ROT HOUR / ROT MIN (Rotate at) 0HR (00)
0 - 59 minutes
S505 ROT BY (Rotate by) 1 (1) 1–8
STBY FT (Stdby Fan Timer at Reheat /
S506 1 min 0 – 5 minutes
Hun)
S507 DO ROT (Perform one Rotation) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
NO, YES, COOL,
CO/HE, FAN (No,
S508 CASCADE (Cascade Units) NO (No)
Yes, Cooling,
Cool/Heat, Fan)
S509 CAS DEL (Cascaded Units Delay) 10 MIN 0 – 30 Minutes
S510 CAS QUI (Cascaded Units Quick Start) 2 MIN 0 – 30 Minutes
S511 CAS MIN (Cascaded Units Min Run) 30 MIN 2 – 360 Minutes
S512 CAS CTRL (Cascaded Units Control Delay) 5 MIN 0 – 30 Minutes
S513 STBY HT (Start all Standby Units by HT) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
Stdby Fan Timer at Reheat / Hum: Sets the time the fan will continue to operate
S506 when the unit goes to standby or sleep mode if the reheat or humidifier were
operating at that time.
107

Maintenance / Wellness Parameters
Basic Settings, page 1 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S001 (Password) - -
S002 FREQ/YR (Maintenance Frequency Per Year) 1 0 – 12
S003 BONUS (Max Bonus) 0 0 – 12 days
S004 PENALTY (Max Penalty) 0 0 – 12 days
S005 LAST PM YY/MM/DD (Last Maintenance) - MM/DD/YYYY
S006 SERVICE (Service Engineer) - Name
S007 CONFIRM (Confirm PM) - No, Yes
S008 NEXT PM (Calculated Next Maintenance) - MM/YYYY
Wellness Motor Settings, page 2 of 9

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S012 (Password) - -
S013 STARTS (Number of Starts) - 0 – 32000
S014 RUN HRS (Run Hours) - 0 – 32000 hrs
S015 AVG RUN (Average Run Time) - 0 – 999 min
S016 BEST (Starts per Day Best) 1 1 – 240
S017 WORST (Starts per Day Worst) 24 1 – 240
S018 ALARMS (Number of Alarms) - 0 - 32000
S019 BONUS (Actual Bonus) - -12 to +12 days
108

Wellness Compressor 1 Settings, page 3 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S023 (Password) - -
S029 HP AL (Number of HP Alarms) - 0 - 32000
S030 LP AL (Number of LP Alarms) - 0 – 32000
S031 OL AL (Number of OL Alarms) - 0 – 32000
S032 DS HT AL (Number of DS HT Alarms) - 0 - 32000
Wellness Compressor 2 Settings, page 4 of 9

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S034 (Password) - -
S040 HP AL (Number of HP Alarms) - 0 - 32000
S041 LP AL (Number of LP Alarms) - 0 – 32000
S042 OL AL (Number of OL Alarms) - 0 – 32000
S043 DS HT AL (Number of DS HT Alarms) - 0 - 32000
109

Wellness Electric Heater 1 Settings, page 5 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S045 (Password) - -

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S056 (Password) - -

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S067 (Password) - -
110

Wellness Humidifier Settings, page 8 of 9
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S078 (Password) - -
Wellness Economizer Settings, page 9 of 9

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S089 (Password) - -
S090 REPOS HI / LO (Number of Repositions) - 0 – 32 Million
S091 RUN HRS (Run Hours) - 0 – 999,999 hrs
S092 REP/HR (Repositions Per Hour) - 0 – 999,999
111

Diagnostics / Service Mode, page 1 of 8
Menu Parameter
Range
S301 (Password) -
S302 HP1 CODE (HP 1 Alarm Code) 0: No Alarm, 2: High Pressure Alarm Active
S303 HP2 CODE (HP 2 Alarm Code) 0: No Alarm, 2: High Pressure Alarm Active
S304 HT1 CNT (HT 1 Alarm Counter) 0 - 999
S305 HT2 CNT (HT 2 Alarm Counter) 0 - 999
S306 LP1 CODE (LP 1 Alarm Code) 0: No Alarm, 2: Low Pressure Alarm Active
S307 LP2 CODE (LP 2 Alarm Code) 0: No Alarm, 2: Low Pressure Alarm Active
S308 LP1 ACT (Actual LP1 Pressure) -145.0 to +725.0 psi (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
S309 LP2 ACT (Actual LP2 Pressure) -145.0 to +725.0 psi (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
S310 HP1 ACT (Actual HP1 Pressure) -145.0 to +725.0 psi (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
S311 HP2 ACT (Actual HP2 Pressure) -145.0 to +725.0 psi (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
Notes:
If either menu line S304 HT 1 Alarm Counter or S305 HT Alarm Counter records 5
events in a rolling 4 hour period that compressor is locked OFF.
Menu lines S310 and S311are only available on water or glycol units equipped
with motorized ball valves.
112

Menu Parameter
Range
S312 (Password) -
S313 MANUAL (Manual Mode) NO, YES (No, Yes)
S314 MOTOR(S) (Motors) OFF, ON (Off, On)
RUN, EVAC, CHARG
S315 C1 MODE (Compressor 1 Mode)
(Run, Evacuate, Charge)
S316 COMP1 (Compressor 1) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S317 C1 CAP (Compressor 1 Capacity) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S318 C1 CYCLE (Compressor 1 Cycle Ramp) 0 – 100%
S319 LLSV1 (Compressor 1 LLSV) OFF, ON (Off, On)
RUN, EVAC, CHARG
S320 C2 MODE (Compressor 2)
(Run, Evacuate, Charge)
S321 COMP2 (Compressor 2) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S322 C2 CAP (Compressor 2 Capacity) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S32A C2 CYCLE (Compressor 2 Cycle Ramp) 0 – 100%
S32B LLSV2 (Compressor 2 LLSV) OFF, ON (Off, On)

Menu Parameter
Range
S323 (Password) -
S324 EL HEAT1 (Electric Heat 1 or HG/HW) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S325 EL HEAT2 (Electric Heat 2 or E.Heat 1) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S326 EL HEAT3 (Electric Heat 3 or E.Heat 2) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S327 SCR HEAT (SCR Heat) 0 - 100%
S328 DEHUM (Dehumidification Output) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S329 HUM FILL (Humidifier Fill) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S330 HUM (Humidifier) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S331 H DRAIN (Humidifier Drain) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S332 HUM.C. (Humidifier Current) 0.00 – 40.00A
S333 Q15 STAT (Q15 Output State) OFF, ON (Off, On)
113

Menu Parameter
Range
S334 (Password) -
S335 ALM REL (Alarm Relay) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S336 FC REL (K11 Relay) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S337 3P1 / 3P2 OPEN (3P 1 or 2 Actuator Open) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S338 3P1 / 3P2 CLOSE (3P 1 or 2 Actuator Close) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S339 BV CTRL (BV Control) MAN, AUTO (Manual, Auto)
S340 MBV1 POS / MVB2 POS (MVB 1 or 2 Position) 0 - 100%
S341 ANALOG1 (Analog Out 1) 0 – 100%
Diagnostics / Service Mode, page 5 of 8 – Read Only

Menu Parameter
Range
S345 RSD (Status Remote Shutdown) ON, OFF (On, Off)
S346 AIR LOSS (Status Airflow Loss) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S347 MOTOR OL (Motor Overload / EC Fan Fault) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S348 FILTER (Status Filter) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S349 CUSTOM 1 (Status Customer Input 1) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S353 HEAT SAF (Status Heater Safety) OK, ACT
S354 FLOW AT (Loss of Airflow at) 0 – 100%
S355 FLOW ACT (Actual airflow) 0 – 100%
114

Menu Parameter
Range
S356 HP1 (Status HP1) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S357 LP1 (Status LP1) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S358 C1 OL (Status C1 OL) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S359 HP2 (Status HP2) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S360 LP2 (Status LP2) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S361 C2 OL (Status C2 OL) OK, ACT (OK, Active)

Menu Parameter
Range
S367 HUM PROB (Status Humidifier Problem) OK, ACT (OK, Active)
S368 DT1 (Status DT1 Room / Outdoor ) OK, NOK (Ok, Not OK)
S369 DT2 (Status DT2 Room / FC Fluid) OK, NOK (OK, Not OK)
S370 DT3 (Status DT3 Room / Setpoint) OK, NOK (OK, Not OK)
S371 DT4 (Status Eco Zone) OK, NOK (OK, Not OK)
S372 MIN CW (Status Min CW) OK, NOK (OK, Not OK)
S373 LWD VAL (LWD Value) 0 – 100
S374 LSI (not on Large Display) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S375 COND 2 (Status Condenser 2 Failure) OFF, ON (Off, On)
S376 COND 1 (Status Condenser 1 Failure) OFF, ON (Off, On)

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S378 (Password) - -
S379 V_CTRL (Valve Control) TIME (Time) TIME, FEEDB (Time, Feedback)
S380 V_CAL (Start Valve Calibration) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
S381 CAL_STAT (Calibration Status) IDLE (Idle) IDLE, RUN (Idle, Ongoing)
S382 CLSD 1 (V1: 0% open) 3.90V (0.00V – 10.0V)
S383 OPEN 1 (V1: 100% open) 0.10V (0.00V – 10.0V)
S384 V1FDB (Current V1 Feedback) - (0.00V – 10.0V)
S385 CLSD 2 (V2: 0% open) 3.90V (0.00V – 10.0V)
S386 OPEN 2 (V2: 100% open) 0.10V (0.00V – 10.0V)
S387 V2FDB (Current V2 Feedback) - (0.00V – 10.0V)
115

Parameter
Menu
line
(Large Display)
S201 (Password) - -
RTN SNSR / RET DEL
YES (Enabled) / YES, NO (Enabled, Disabled)
S202 (Return Sensor Alarms / Init
90 sec / 10 – 9999 seconds
Delay)
HI TEMP (High Return
S203 100°F (37.8°C) 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Temperature)
LO TEMP (Low Return
S204 65°F (18.3°C) 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Temperature)
HI HUM (High Return
S205 65.0% 1.0 – 99.0%
Humidity)
LOW HUM (Low Return
S206 35.0% 1.0 – 99.0%
Humidity)
SENSOR A / SE A DEL
NO (Disabled) / NO, YES (Enabled, Disabled)
S207 (Sensor A Alarms / Init
90 sec / 10 – 9999 seconds
Delay)
HI TEMPA (High
S208 90°F (32.3°C) 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Temperature Sensor A)
LO TEMPA (Low
S209 55°F (12.8°C) 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Temperature Sensor A)
HI HUM A (High Humid
S210 70.0% 1.0 – 99.0%
Sensor A)
LO HUM A (Low Humid
S211 30.0% 1.0 – 99.0%
Sensor A)
FLOCT (Loss of Flow
S21A 0 Sec 0 – 180 seconds
Compressor Timer)
LOF THRH (Loss of Flow
S21B 10% 0 – 30%
CFC Threshold)
116

Menu Parameter
SMALL DISPLAY (Large Default Range
line
S212 Display)
(Password) - -
SUP SNSR / SUP DEL
NO (Disabled) / NO, YES (Enabled, Disabled) /
S213 (SUP Sensor Alarms / Init
90 sec 10 – 9999 seconds
Delay)
HI SUP T / LO SUP T
High 75°F (23.9°C)
S214 (High / Low Supply 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Low 50°F (10.0°C)
Temperature)
DP AL / DP DEL (Dew NO (Disabled) / NO, YES (Enabled, Disabled) /
S215
Point Alarms / Init Delay) 90 sec 10 – 9999 seconds
HI DP / LO DP (High / Low High 59°F (15.0°C)
S216 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Dew Point) Low 39°F (3.9°C)
DP A AL / DP A DEL (Dew
S217 Point A Alarms / Init
Delay)
HI DP A / LO DP A (High / High 62°F (16.7°C)
S218 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Low Dew Point Sensor A) Low 36°F ( 2.2°C)
REM SNSR / REM DEL
S219 (Remote Sensor Alarms /
Init Delay)
HI REM / LO REM (High / High 90°F (32.3°C)
S220 34 - 210°F (1.0 - 99.0°C)
Low Remote Temperature) Low 55°F (12.8°C)
(Separate Thresholds User
S221 - Text Readout Only
/ Set Alarms)
EEV ALBD (EEV
S222 NC (NC) NC, NO (NC, NO)
Alarmboard)
FAIL OP (Operation on FULLC FULLC, SHUTD
S22A
Sensor Failure) (Full Cooling) (Full Cooling, Shutdown)
117

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S223 (Password) - -
WATER
S224 CUST IN1 (Customer Input 1) See Note
(Water Alarm)
CLOSE CLOSE, OPEN
S225 C1 ACT (Customer Input 1 active when)
(Closed) (Closed, Open)
WATER
(Water Alarm)
CLOSE, OPEN
S227 C2 ACT (Customer Input 2 active when) CLOSE (Closed)
(Closed, Open)
WATER
(Water Alarm)
CLOSE, OPEN
(Closed, Open)
WATER
(Water Alarm)
CLOSE, OPEN
(Closed, Open)
WA AC AL (Warning Activates Alarm YES, NO
S232 YES (Yes)
Relay) (Yes, No)
WAT OFF (Water Alarm Shuts Down NO, YES
S233 NO (No)
Unit) (Yes, No)
Note: Customer Input 1, 2, 3 and 4 alarm messages are selected by the

customer. See the table on the next page for the pre-programmed alarm message
choices. The customer cannot write a custom alarm message.
118

Small Display messages are shown below CAPITAL letters, all Large Display
messages are shown in (parenthesis).
Customer Input 1, 2, 3 and 4 alarm messages are selected by the customer.

Below are the pre-programmed alarm message choices. The customer cannot
write a custom alarm message.
Alarm Display Messages Alarm Display Messages Alarm Display Messages

SMALL DISPLAY SMALL DISPLAY SMALL DISPLAY
(Large Display) (Large Display) (Large Display)
SMOKE (Smoke) RH+HU (Rht+Hum Lock) RJTVS (HTRJ TVSS)
WATER (Water Alarm) COMP (Comp Lockout) FIRE (Fire Alarm)
C PMP (C Pmp Alarm) CALL (Call Service) 2.SET (2nd Setpoint)
FLOW (Flow Alarm) TEMP (High Temp) NOP (No Power)
G PMP (Stdby G Pmp) AIR (Air Loss) LSI (Lsi)
STBY (Stdby Unit) FC L. (FC Lockout) CND 1 (Cond 1 Fail)
C-IN1 (C-Input 1) HEATA (Heater Alarm) CND 2 (Cond 2 Fail)
C-IN2 (C-Input 2) FLOSD (Flow AL SD) SCRED (D-Scroll Red)
C-IN3 (C-Input 3) FLOLC (Flow AL LC) SWAPV (Swap Valve)
C-IN4 (C-Input 4) COMPD (Comp Lock PD) ECFAN (EC Fan Fault)
RHT (Rht Lockout) EN FC (Enable FC) ECO (ECO Airflow)
HUM (Hum Lockout) RJVFD (HTRJ VFD)
The technician can change the control response to some of the event that can
occur at the unit from the default setting. Event Types and unit responses:
 Message: if this event occurs, it will only be entered into the event log.
There is no indication that the event has occurred.
 Warning: if this event occurs it will generate a flashing red LED and audible
alarm at the unit and will be entered into the event log. When the warning
event is acknowledged and cleared these steps will also be entered into the
event log. The technician can set the parameter “Warning Activates Alarm
Relay” which will make all warning events respond as an alarm.
 Alarm: if this event occurs, the control response is the same a warming but
the control will also activate the common alarm relay. When the alarm
event is acknowledged and cleared these steps will also be entered into the
event log. If the units networked into a group and lead / lag is selected an
alarm event will cause a rotation to a standby unit.
119

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
SMALL DISPLAY Range in Default / Range
Line Range
(Large Display) Seconds
S234 (Password) - - -
FOL 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S236
(Main Fan Overload) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
LOA 30 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S237
(Loss of Airflow) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
CF 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S238
(Clogged Filters) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
HRT 30 sec / YES, NO
S239 WRN
(High Room Temp) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
LRT 30 sec / YES, NO
S240 WRN
(Low Room Temp) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
HRH 30 sec / YES, NO
S241 WRN
(High Room Hum) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
LRH 30 sec / YES, NO
S242 WRN
(Low Room Hum) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
HTA 30 sec / NO, YES
S243 WRN
(High Temp Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable)
LTA 30 sec / NO, YES
S244 WRN
(Low Temp Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable)
HHA 30 sec / NO, YES
S245 WRN
(High Hum Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable)
LHA 30 sec / NO, YES
S246 WRN
(Low Hum Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable)
When the unit fan(s) first start all High / Low Room Temperature and Humidity
alarm conditions are ignored for the first 60 seconds.
120

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
OL1 YES, NO ALM /
S249 Non Adj
(Comp 1 Overload) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
OL2 YES, NO ALM /
S250 Non Adj
(Comp 2 Overload) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
HP1 (Circuit 1 High YES, NO ALM /
S251 Non Adj
Press) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
HP2 (Circuit 2 High YES, NO ALM /
S252 Non Adj
LP1 (Circuit 1 Low YES, NO ALM /
S253 Non Adj
LP2 (Circuit 2 Low YES, NO ALM /
S254 Non Adj
PD1 (Circuit1 YES, NO ALM /
S255 Non Adj
Pumpdown Fail) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
PD2 (Circuit 2 YES, NO ALM /
S256 Non Adj
Pumpdown Fail) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
HT1 (Dig Scroll1 High YES, NO ALM /
S257 Non Adj
Temp) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
HT2 (Dig Scroll2 High YES, NO ALM /
S258 Non Adj
Temp) (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
EHO 10 sec YES, NO WRN /
S259
(EL Heat High Temp) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) ALM, MSG
121

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
WHE (Working Hrs 10 sec / YES, NO
S262 WRN
Exceeded) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
SMO 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S263
(Smoke Detected) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
WUF 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S264
(Water Under Floor) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
CPH (Cond Pump- 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S265
High Water) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
LOF 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S266
(Loss of Flow) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
SGP (STBY Glycol 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S267
Pump On) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
STB 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S268
(Standby Unit On) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
HUP 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S269
(Humidifier Problem) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
NOC (No Connection 300 sec / YES, NO
S270 WRN
w/ Unit 1) 10 - 9999 (Enable, Disable)
UxD (Unit X YES, NO
S271 Non Adj WRN
Disconnected) (Enable, Disable)
YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S272 LOP (Loss of Power) Non Adj
(Enable, Disable) MSG
122

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
CI1 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S275
(Customer Input 1) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
S276
S277
S278
CS 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S279
(Call Service) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
HTD 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S280
(High Temperature) 0 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
LB1 (Loss of Air 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S281
Blower 1) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
RL 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S282
(Reheat Lockout) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
HL 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S283
(Humidifier Lockout) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
FCL 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S284
(FC Lockout) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
CL (Compressor(s) 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S285
Lockout) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
123

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
SC1 (Comp 1 Short 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S288
Cycle) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
SC2 (Comp 2 Short 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S289
Cycle) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S290 NOP (No Power)
10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
CN1 (Condenser 1 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S291
Failure) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
CN2 (Condenser 2 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S292
Failure) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
15 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S293 EFF (EC Fan Fault)
10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
HST (High Supply 30 sec / YES, NO
S294 WRN
Temperature) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
LST (Low Supply 30 sec / YES, NO
S295 WRN
Temperature) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
REA (Reduced ECO 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S296
Airflow) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
EMO (ECO HI Temp 10 sec / YES, NO WRN / ALM,
S297
Override) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
TCS (Temp CTRL 10 sec / YES, NO ALM / WRN,
S298
Sensor Fail) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) MSG
124

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
HDP (High Dew 30 sec / YES, NO
S2A2 WRN
Point) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
30 sec / YES, NO
S2A3 LDP (Low Dew Point) WRN
10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
HDA (High Dew Point 30 sec / YES, NO
S2A4 WRN
Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
LDA (Low Dew Point 30 sec / YES, NO
S2A5 WRN
Sensor A) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
HRS (High Remote 30 sec / YES, NO
S2A6 WRN
Sensor) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
LRS (Low Remote 30 sec / YES, NO
S2A7 WRN
Sensor) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
POA (Power “A” 10 sec / YES, NO
S2A8 ALM / WRN
Failure 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
POB (Power “B” 10 sec / YES, NO
S2A9 ALM / WRN
Failure) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable)
ATF (Airflow Sensor 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2B1
Fail) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) ALM, MSG
HSF (Hum CTRL 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2B2
Sensor Fail) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) ALM, MSG
10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2B3 LOF (Loss of Flow)
10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
125

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
S2B4 (Password) - - -
SPF (Stat Press 12 sec / NO, YES ALM /
S2B6
Sensor Fail) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable) WRN, MSG
LSP (Low Static 120 sec / NO, YES WRN /
S2B7
Press) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable) ALM, MSG
HSP (High Static 120 sec / NO, YES WRN /
S2B8
Press) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable) ALM, MSG
SPR (Stat Press Out 150 sec / NO, YES WRN /
S2B9
of Range) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable) ALM, MSG
DMF (Damper 10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2C1
Failure) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
S2C8 (Password) - - -
1AOL (Comp 1A 10 sec / NO, YES ALM /
S2D1
Overload) 10 – 9999 (Disable, Enable) WRN, MSG
1BOL (Comp 1B 10 sec / NO, YES ALM /
S2D2
2AOL (Comp 2A 10 sec / NO, YES ALM /
S2D3
2BOL (Comp 2B 10 sec / NO, YES ALM /
S2D4
1AHT (Comp 1A High 10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2D5
Temp) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) WRN, MSG
1BHT (Comp 1B High 10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2D6
2AHT (Comp 2A High 10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2D7
2BHT (Comp 2B High 10 sec / YES, NO ALM /
S2D8
1ASC (Comp 1A 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2D9
Short Cycle) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) ALM, MSG
1BSC (Comp 1B 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2E1
2ASC (Comp 2A 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2E2
126

Parameter Default /
Menu Default /
Line Range
S2E3 (Password) - - -
2BSC (Comp 2B 10 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2E5
ATD (GCB Ambient 60 sec / YES, NO WRN /
S2E6
Temp Diff) 10 – 9999 (Enable, Disable) ALM, MSG
Optional iCOM DO Setup Parameters – Large Display only, page 1 of 3

Menu Parameter
Range
Line (Large Display)
S720 (Password) -
S721 (iCOM-DO #0) (Not Connected, Connected)
S725 (Override #0) (No, Relay 0 to Relay 15)

Output # Status
Menu Parameter ID Default
Default / Default /
Line (Large Display) / Range
Range Range
S732 Event Description - - -
S733 (Cooling Status) No / No, 0 1 / 1 - 15 0/1
S734 (Heating Status) No / No, 0 2 / 1 - 15 0/1
S735 (Humidifying Status) No / No, 0 3 / 1 - 15 0/1
S736 (Dehumidifying Status) No / No, 0 4 / 1 - 15 0/1
S737 (High Temperature) No / No, 0 5 / 1 - 15 0/1
S738 (High Humidity) No / No, 0 6 / 1 - 15 0/1
S739 (Low Temperature) No / No, 0 7 / 1 - 15 0/1
S740 (Low Humidity) No / No, 0 8 / 1 - 15 0/1
127

Output # Status
Menu Parameter ID Default
Default / Default
Line (Large Display) / Range
Range / Range
S743 Event Description - - -
S744 (High Head Pressure C1) No / No, 0 9 / 1 - 15 0/1
S745 (High Head Pressure C2) No / No, 0 9 / 1 - 15 0/1
S746 (Loss of Airflow) No / No, 0 10 / 1 - 15 0/1
S747 (Change Filters) No / No, 0 11 / 1 - 15 0/1
S748 (Water Alarm) No / No, 0 12 / 1 - 15 0/1
S749 (Condensing Pump Alarm) No / No, 0 13 / 1 - 15 0/1
S750 (Glycool Status) No / No, 0 14 / 1 - 15 0/1
S751 (Unit On) No / No, 0 15 / 1 - 15 0/1
Sensor Calibration / Setup Parameters, page 1 of 7

Menu Parameter
Range
S601 (Password) -
S602 RTN TEMP (Return Temperature THB) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S603 CAL TEMP (Calibrated Return Temp THB) read only 32 - 122°F (0.0 – 50.0°C)
S604 RTN HUM (Return Humidity) ±9.9%
S605 CAL HUM (Calibrated Return Humidity) read only 20 – 80%
S606 DS1 NTC (DigiScroll 1 / 1A NTC) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL FS1 / DS1 (Calibrated Disch 1A / 1B
S607 read only 84 - 313°F (29.0 – 156.0°C)
or DigiScroll 1 NTC)
S608 DS2 NTC (Digiscroll 2 / 2A NTC) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL FS2 / DS2 (Calibrated Disch 2A / 2B
S609 read only 84 - 313°F (29.0 – 156.0°C)
or DigiScroll 2 NTC)
S610 DS SEN (DigiScroll Discharge Sensor) No, EEV, Int
S611 FS SENS (FixedScroll Discharge Sensor) No, EEV
S61A OUT SNS (Outdoor Sensor) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S61B CAL OUT (Calibrated Outdoor Sensor) read only 4 - 113°F (-15.0 to 45.0°C)
128

Menu Parameter
Range
S612 (Password) -
S613 TEMP A1T (Optional Sensor A1T) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL A1T (Calibrated Optional Sensor
S614 read only 32 - 122°F (0.0 – 50.0°C)
A1T)
S615 HUM A1H (Optional Sensor A1H) ±9.9%
CAL A1H (Calibrated Optional Sensor
S616 read only 20 – 80%
A1H)
S617 TYPE B (Optional Sensor B Type) 2T, TH
S618 TEMP B1T (Optional Sensor B1T) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL B1T (Calibrated Optional Sensor
S619 read only 32 - 122°F (0.0 – 50.0°C)
B1T)
S620 HUM B2H (Optional Sensor B2H) TH ±9.9% (2T ±18°F / ±9.99°K)
CAL B2H (Calibrated Optional Sensor read only 20 – 80%
S621
B2H) (32 - 122°F / 0.0 – 50.0°C Dew Point)
S622 TEMP B2T (Optional Sensor B2T) ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL B2T (Calibrated Optional Sensor
S62A read only 32 - 122°F (0.0 – 50.0°C)
B2T)
S62B TYPE C (Optional Sensor C Type) TH, 2T
129

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S623 (Password) - -
S624 FC SNSR (Freecool Sensor PTC or NTC) NTC PTC, NTC
S625 FC SNSR (Freecool Sensor) - ±18°F (±9.99°K)

read only 4 - 113°F
S626 CAL FC (Calibrated Freecool Sensor) -
(-15.0 to 45.0°C)
SUP SNSR (Supply / Return Sensor PTC
S627 NTC PTC, NTC
or NTC)
S628 SUP TEMP (Supply / Return Sensor) - ±18°F (±9.99°K)
CAL SUP (Calibrated Supply / Return read only 32 - 122°F
S629 -
Sensor) (0.0 – 50.0°C)
TEMP C1T / AMB TEMP (Offset Optional
S630 - ±18°F (±9.99°K)
Sensor C1T / Outdoor Temperature)
CAL C1T / CAL AMBT (Calibrated Optional read only 32 - 122°F
S631 -
Sensor C1T / Outdoor Temperature) (0.0 – 50.0°C)
HUM C2H / AMB HUM (Offset Optional
S632 - ±9.9%
Sensor C2H / Outdoor Humidity)
read only 20 – 80%
CAL C2H / CAL AMBH (Calibrated
S633 - (32 - 122°F / 0.0 –
Optional Sensor C2H / Outdoor Humidity)
50.0°C Dew Point)
S63A TEMP C2T (Optional Sensor C2T) ±18°F (±9.99°K
CAL C2T (Calibrated Optional Sensor read only 32 - 122°F
S63B
C2T) (0.0 – 50.0°C)
130

Parameter
Menu Read Only Display
SMALL DISPLAY Calibration Range
Line Range
(Large Display)
S634 (Password) - -
REM S 1/ CALRS 1 read only 4 - 113°F
S635 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
(Remote Sensor 1) (-15.0 to 45.0°C)
S636 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S637 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S638 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S639 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S640 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S641 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S642 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S643 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S644 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
131

Parameter
Menu Calibration Read Only Display
SMALL DISPLAY
Line Range Range
(Large Display)
S645 (Password) - -
REM S 1B/ CALRS 1B read only 4 - 113°F
S646 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
(Remote Sensor 1B) (-15.0 to 45.0°C)
S647 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S648 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S649 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S650 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S651 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S652 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S653 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S654 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
S655 ±18°F (±9.99°K)
132

Sensor Calibration / Setup Parameters Large Display only, page 6 of 7
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S656 (Password) - -
None, Analog 1,
(DP Transducer is Analog 2,
S657 None
Connected to) Analog 3,
Analog 4
S658 (DP Transducer Setup In) InWC InWC, Pa
0 – 100%,
0%
S659 (DP Transducer Low) 0 – 9.999 InWC,
(000 InWC / 0 Pa)
0 – 2491 Pa
0 – 100%,
100%
S660 (DP Transducer High) 0 – 9.999 InWC,
(2.005 InWC / 500 Pa)
0 – 2491 Pa
S661 (Number of EC Fans) 3 1-5
S662 (Inlet ring K-Value) 480 1 - 999
S665 (DP Transducer Low) read only %, InWC, Pa
S666 (DP Transducer High) read only %, InWC, Pa
S667 (Actual DP Signal) read only %, InWC, Pa
S668 (Calculated Airflow) read only CFM (m³/h)
Sensor Calibration / Setup Parameters Large Display only, page 7 of 7

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S669 (Password) - -
None, Analog 1,
(SP Transducer is Analog 2,
S670 None
Connected to) Analog 3,
Analog 4
S671 (SP Transducer Setup In) Pa InWC, Pa
0 – 100%,
0%
S672 (SP Transducer Low) 0 – 9.999 InWC,
(000 InWC / 0 Pa)
0 – 2491 Pa
0 – 100%,
100%
S673 (SP Transducer High) 0 – 9.999 InWC,
(2.005 InWC / 500 Pa)
0 – 2491 Pa
S678 (SP Transducer Low) read only %, InWC, Pa
S679 (SP Transducer High) read only %, InWC, Pa
S680 (Actual SP Signal) read only %, InWC, Pa
S681 (Currant Static Pressure) read only InWC, Pa
133

Economizer Parameters, page 1 of 3
Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
SA01 (Password) - -
NO, YES,
ECO EN (Enable NO REM (No,
SA02
Economizer) (No) Yes,
Remote)
SA03 Status Min Act Max
OK, 6.0 10.2 2.0 – 30.0

SA04 RAT (Humidity Ratio) g/k
NOK g/k g/k g/k
OK, °F / 55°F / 32 - 860°F /
SA05 WET (Wet Bulb Temp) -
NOK °C 13.0°C 0.0 – 30.0°C
OK, °F /
SA06 OUT (Outdoor Temp) - - -
NOK °C
STOPECO+ (Stop ECO 20°F / 2 - 180°F /
SA07 - - - -
at Setpoint +) 11.1°K 1.0 – 99.0°K
ECO (Economizer OFF OFF, ON
SA08 - - - -
Mode) (Off) (Off, On)
DEWPOINT (Dewpoint
SA09 - - - - °C °F / °C
Calculated)
OVRD AT (Economizer 102°F / 34 - 210°F /
SA10 - - - -
Override At) 38.8°C 1.0 – 99.0°C
DELAY (Delay After 0 – 99
SA11 - - - - 5 min
Fan Start) minute
134

Menu Parameter
Default Range
SA12 (Password) - -
OUT TEMP (Outdoor Air Sensor
SA13 °C °F / °C
Temperature)
SA14 OUT HUMI (Outdoor Air Sensor Humidity) % %
SA15 OUT PRES (Outdoor air Pressure) 1013.2 hPa 100.0 – 1200.0 hPa
SAT PR W (Saturation Pressure Water
SA16 hPa hPa
Vapor)
SA17 SAT PR I (Saturation Pressure Ice) hPa hPa
SA18 PA PRES (Partial Pressure Water Vapor) hPa hPa
VMIX RAT (Volume Mixture Ratio
SA19 ppm ppm
ppm/Vol)
SA20 HUMI RAT (Humidity Ratio g/kg wet) g/kg g/kg
SA21 WET BULB (Wet Bulb Temperature) °C °F / °C

Menu Parameter
Default Range
SA23 (Password) - -
SA24 RET OPEN (Return Damper Open) 2.0 V 0.0 – 10.0 V
SA25 RET CLOS (Return Damper Closed) 2.0 V 0.0 – 10.0 V
SA26 RET MIN (Return Damper Minimum Limit At) 15% 0 – 100%
SA27 OUT OPEN (Outdoor Damper Open) 10.0 V 0.0 – 10.0 V
SA28 OUT CLOS (Outdoor Damper Closed) 2.0 V 0.0 – 10.0 V
SA29 OUT POS (Outdoor Damper Position) - 0 – 100%
SA30 RET POS (Return Damper Position) - 0 – 100%
SA31 ECO DIG(Enable Digital Outputs) - YES, NO (Yes, No)
SA32 DAM RUN (Damper Runtime) 165 sec 30 – 500 seconds
SA33 DAM PAU (Pause Time) 5 sec 1 – 20 seconds
SA34 CF OFF (Stop AirEco on Clogged Filters) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
135
SERVICE MENU’s Continue

Network Setup Parameters – SMALL Display Unit View (Control Board)
Menu Parameter Default Range
Line SMALL DISPLAY
S802 # UNITS 1 1 – 32
NO, 1(Parallel),
S803 TEAMWORK NO 2 (Independent),
3 (Smart Aisle)
MON ADD (Monitoring
S824 3 1 – 99
Address)
MON T.O. / MON H.S.
S825 (Monitoring Time Out / Hand NO / 0 min No / 0 – 120 minutes
Shake)
S830 UPGRADE / UPGRSTAT NO No, Yes, Unlock
CS CTRL / CS STAT
S831 - No, Save, Load
(Configuration Safe)
NW CTRL / NW STAT
S832 No No, Load, Save
(Network Safe)
No, Velocity, Hironet,
MON PROT
S835 Velocity V4 IGM, not available,
(Monitoring Protocol)
Velocity V4
192.168.254.001 (change
S836 IP #1, IP #2, IP #3, IP #4 IP Range
only if networking)
NM #1, NM #2, NM #3, 255.255.255.000
S837 Netmask Range
NM #4 (do Not change)
GW #1, GW #2, GW #3, 000.000.000.000
S838 Gateway Range
GW #4 (do Not change)
S840 U2U PROT (U2U Protocol) GBP GBP
1
S841 U2U ADD (U2U Address) 1 – 32
(change only if networking)
1
S842 U2U GRP (U2U Group) 1 - 99
BL CTRL / BL STAT
S843 No No, Save+Reboot
(Bootloader Variables)
SR CTRL / SR STAT
S844 - No, Clear+Reboot
(Static Ram)
- SW# (Soft Ware Version) - -
- MAC (Machine Code) (do Not change) -
- NAME - 6 Characters
136

System / Network Setup Parameters - System View (Large Display),
page 1 of 2
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S801 (Password) - -
S802 (Number of Connected Units) 1 1 – 32
0 (No), 1 (Parallel),
S803 (Teamwork Mode) 0 (No) 2 (Independent(,
3 (Smart Aisle)
S804 (Teamwork is Based on) Maximum Maximum, Average
S805 (Qty Units Included in Average) 32 1 - 32
S808 Lock for Upgrade - No, Yes, Unlock
S809 (Configuration Safe) - No, Save, Load
S810 (Network Safe) - No, Load, Save
S811 (SW Version) - -
System / Network Setup Parameters – System View (Large Display),

page 2 of 2
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S812 (Password) - -
192.168.254.003 (change
S813 (IP Address) IP Range
only if networking)
255.255.255.000
S814 (Netmask) Netmask
(do Not change)
000.000.000.000
S815 (Gateway) Gateway
(do Not change)
S816 (MAC) (do Not change) MAC
S817 (U2U Protocol) GBP -
33
S818 (U2U Address) 33 - 64
1
S819 (U2U Group) 1 - 99
No,
S821 (Boot Loader Variables) No
Save+Reboot
137

System / Network Setup Parameters – Unit View (Control Board), page 1 of 2
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S823 (Password) - -
S824 (Monitoring Address) 3 1 – 99
No / No, Yes /
S825 (Monitoring Timeout/Handshake) *
0 Min 0 – 120 minutes
S827 (Unit Name) 01 6 Characters
S830 (Lock for Upgrade) No No, Yes, Unlock
S831 (Configuration Safe) - No, Save, Load
S832 (Network Safe) No No, Load, Save
S833 (SW Version) - -
* Note: Parameter used with Liebert OpenComm-485 card to control fan motor by
VFD. Manual timer will down to “0” (zero) which switches the VFD control mode to
“Auto”. When the timer counts to zero a BMS disconnect alarm will be generated.
System / Network Setup Parameters – Unit view (Control Board), page 2 of 2

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S834 (Password) - -
No, Velocity V3, Hironet,
S835 (Monitoring Protocol) Velocity V4 IGM, not available,
Velocity V4
192.168.254.001 (change
S836 (IP Address) IP Range
only if networking)
255.255.255.000
S837 (Netmask) Netmask
(do Not change)
000.000.000.000
S838 (Gateway) Gateway
(do Not change)
S839 (MAC) (do Not change) MAC
S840 (U2U Protocol) GBP GBP
1
S841 (U2U Address) 1 – 32
1
S842 (U2U Group) 1 - 99
S843 (Bootloader Variables) No No, Save+Reboot
S844 (Static Ram) - No, Clear+Reboot
138

Options Setup Parameters, page 1 of 6
Menu Parameter
Default Range
S401 (Password) - -
S402 COMP SEQ (Compressor Sequence) AUTO AUTO, 1, 2
S403 LP DELAY (Low Pressure Alarm Delay) 3 min 0 – 5 minutes

EL HEAT / EL OUTP / EL ROT (Electric
S404 0 0, 1, 2, 3 / No, Yes
Stages / Outputs / Rotate)
S405 HW HEAT (Hot Water Heat On/Off) NO NO, YES
S406 ALL HEAT (Total Heat Stages) 3 0, 1, 2, 3
S407 LWDconn (LWD Connected) NO NO, YES
TIME, FEEDB
S408 V_CTRL (Valve Control) TIME
(Time, Feedback)
S409 3P RUN (3P Actuator Runtime) 165 sec 30 – 500 seconds
DIR DIR, REV
S410 3P DIR (3P Actuator Direction)
(Direct) (Direct, Reverse)
S411 VPULS (Minimum Valve Pulse) 5% 0 – 10%
CW DEL / CW POWOF (CW Valve 5 min / 0 – 60 minutes /
S41B
Delay / Power Off Time) 30 min 0 – 300 minutes

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S412 (Password) - -
S413 HUM ENAB (Humidification Enabled) NO NO, YES
S414 IR FLUSH (Infrared Flush Rate) 150% 110 – 500%
S415 HUMSTREAM (Humidifier Steam Rate) 100% 0 - 100%
ON, OFF, PROP
S416 HUMCONT (Humidifier Control) ON (On, Off,
Proportional
S417 HUMFLUSH (Humidifier Bottle Flush Time) 5 sec 5 – 30 sec
MANFLUSH (Humidifier Bottle Manual
S418 NO NO, YES
Flush)
DEHUM EN / DEH UNIT / DEH FAN
S419 YES YES, NO
(Dehum System / Unit / Fan Ctrl)
S420 REST EN (Auto Restart Enabled) YES YES, NO
S421 RESTART (Single Unit Auto Restart) 5 sec 0 – 999 seconds
S422 ONOFF EN (On-Off Enabled) YES YES, NO
S42A FANOFFDL (Fan shutdown Delay Timer) 0 sec 0 – 999 seconds
139

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S423 (Password) - -
S424 CW FLUSH (CW Flush) 24 hr 0 – 99 hours
S425 FC FLUSH (Freecooling Flush) 24 hr 0 – 99 hours
S426 HW FLUSH (Hot Water Flush) 24 hr 0 – 99 hours
BALL OFF (Ball Valve Setpoint R22and R407C: R22 and R407C:
S427
Offset) 30 psi (2.1 bar) 0 - 70 psi (0.0 – 4.8 bar)
OFF, LQT, FCF, CHF, LTA,
S428 HEAT AS (Heater Outputs as) LQT
HTA
SINGL, 2 PAR, 2 ALT, 2 CAS
S429 CW CTRL (CW Valve Control) SINGL (Single) (Single, 2 Parallel, 2 Alternate,
2 Cascade)
S430 MAIN V (Main Valve) 0 0, 1, 2
VALV ROT (Auto Valve
S431 NO (Disabled) NO, YES (Disabled, Enabled)
Rotation)
VALV TIM (Valve Rotation
S432 10 0 - 23
Hour)
SINGL, 2 PAR, 2 ALT, 2 CAS
DEHUM OP (Dehum
S433 SINGL (Single) (Single, 2 Parallel, 2 Alternate,
Operation)
2 Cascade)
140

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S434 (Password) - -
S435 Measure Type Precision
xCONFIG, FACST, xUSED, AIRP1 – 4,
PRESS 1 – 4, TEMP1 – 4,PCT1 – 4, /
ANINC1 / ANINP1 INVAL, 0 – 5V, 0 – 10V
xCONF / 0 – 5V
S436 (Analog Input 1 / (Not Config, Factory Std., not used,
(Not Config)
Analog Input Precision) Air Pres 1 – 4, Pressure 1 – 4,
Temp 1 – 4, Percent 1 – 4 / Invalid,
0 – 5V, 0 – 10V)
ANINP2 / ANINP2 xCONF / 0 – 5V
S437 See line U436 for program choices
(Analog Input 2) (Not Config)
ANINC3 / ANINP3 xCONF / 0 – 5V
(Analog input 3) (Not Config)
ANINC4 / ANINP4 xCONF / 0 – 5V
(Analog Input 4) (Not Config)
UNITS (Units System
S441 ENG (English) ENG, SI (English, Metric)
for Custom Inputs)
Note: Parameter lines U436 – U439 will display information in either English or SI
as determined by the setting of parameter S441 Units system for Custom Inputs.
Measurement Units
Type English SI
Air Pressure inWC Pa
Pressure PSI Bar
Temp °F °C
Percent % %
141

Menu Parameter
Default Range
S445 (Password) - -
AN1STRT / AN1UNIT / AN1STRT V -320.00 to 320.00 / °F, °C, Bar,
S446 °F
(Analog Input 1 Start Point) Pas, %, PSI, inWG, 0.0 – 10.0V
AN1END / AN1UNIT / AN1END V -320.00 to 320.00 / °F, °C, Bar,
S447 °F
(Analog Input 1 End Point Pas, %, PSI, inWG, 0.0 – 10.0V
AN2STRT / AN2UNIT / AN2STRT -320.00 to 320.00 / °F, °C, Bar,
S448 °F
V (Analog Input 2 Start Point) Pas, %, PSI, inWG, 0.0 – 10.0V
S449 °F
(Analog Input 2 End Point) Pas, %, PSI, inWG, 0.0 – 10.0V
S450 °F
S451 °F
S452 °F
S453 °F
142

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
S456 (Password) - -
NO, DEH, COOL, RHT, CMP, CMP1,
CMP2, HUM, FAN, FRC, DMP, HITE,
LOTE, LOP, POW S (None, Dehum On,
S457 Q15 FUNC (Q15 Function) -- Cooling On, Reheat On. Comp On,
Comp 1 On, Comp 2 On, Humii On,
FreeCool On, Damper, High Temp, Low
Temp, Loss of Power, Power Source
Q15 DIR (Q15 Output DIR
S458 DIR, REV (Direct, Reverse)
Direction) (Direct)
Q15 DMP (Q15 Fan Delay
S459 30 sec 0 – 120 seconds
for Damper)
Q15 SWI (Q15 Damper
S460 30 sec 0 – 120 seconds
Switch Feedback Timer)
RET, SUO, REMH, REML, REMA
Q15 TESE (Q15 Temp
S461 RET (Return, Supply, Rem Max, Rem Low,
Output Sensor)
Rem Avg)
Q15 TRTH (Q15 Temp 80°F
S462 32 to 150°F (0.0 to 65.5°C)
Output Threshold) (26.7°C)
S463 Q15 (Q15 Actual) -- °F, °C
MED Q15 (Medium Board
S465 No No, Yes
Q15 Map to K11)
Q15 STAT (Q15 Output
S466 -- Off, On
Status)
143

Service Contacts Parameters
Parameter
Menu
SMALL DISPLAY Range
Line
(Large Display)
S701 (Password) -
NONE, AUSTRIA, SWISS D, SWISS F
BENELUX D, BENEL FL, GERMANY,
FRANCE, UK, HUNGARY, ITALY, POLAND,
SPAIN, USA, AUSTRALIA, N ZEALAND,
COUNTRY INDONESIA, MALAYSIA, SINGAPORE (None,
S702
(Country) Austria, Switzerland D, Switzerland F,
Benelux D, Benelux FL, Germany, France, UK,
Hungary, Italy, Poland, Spain, United States,
Australia, New Zealand, Indonesia, Malaysia,
Singapore)
ADDRESS LINE 1
S703 Text - String
(Line 1)
ADDRESS LINE 2
S704 Text - String
(Line 2)
ADDRESS LINE 3
S705 Text - String
(Line 3)
ADDRESS LINE 4
S706 Text - String
(Line 4)
144

Remote Sensors Setup Parameters
Menu Parameter
Default Range
SB01 (Password) - -
I REM (Individual Remote
SB02 - -
Sensors Mode)
U REM / AVG INCL (Unit AVG
AVG, MAX (Maximum,
SB03 Remote Sensors Mode / AVG (Average)
Average) / 0 - 10
incl) / 10
DIS / REF / CONTRL
REM A 01 / S01 NAME (Remote DIS
SB04 (Disabled, Reference, Control) /
Sensor Node 01 / Name / Value) (Disabled)
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
DIS / REF / CONTRL
4 to 113°F (-25.0 to 12.5°C)
Note: The user can individually identify each remote sensor node by entering a
four (4) character name.
145
ADVANCED MENU
Small Display parameters are shown below in CAPITAL letters and Large
Display parameters are shown in (Parenthesis). Parameters may be System
or Unit and either Read only or Read / Write.
Note: Not all menu icons are available for selection at the present time.
Factory Settings Parameters, page 1 of 10
Menu
Parameter Value Value Value Value Value Value
Line
A001 Password
A002 Unit Field Code 001 002 003 004 005 006
A003 Set Code xx xx xx xx xx xx
A004 Unit Field Code 007 008 009 010 011 012
A006 Unit Field Code 013 014 015 016 017 018
No, Save+Execute,
A008 Unit Code Control No
Load+Execute, Compare
Not Available, Invalid, OK,
A009 Unit Code Status --
Changed, Updating
A010 Exception List Control No No, Load
Not Available, Invalid, OK,
A011 Exception List Status --
Changed, Updating
Notes: Menu lines A008 and A009 are for the unit code. When the status
indicates “Code Not Available” you will need to enter the correct code for the
system as listed on the decal located on the dead front panel of the unit. These
values must be entered on menu lines A003, A005 and A007.
When the unit code has been entered scroll to menu line A008, select the
“Save+Execute command and then select the “Load+Execute” command. The
unit code status menu line A009 should display “OK”.
146
ADVANCED MENU Continued

See unit code configuration tables in this manual for the various code descriptions
Menu line A011 is for the exception list. If this line displays “Not Available” scroll
to menu line A010, exception list control, and select the “Load” command.

Menu Parameter
Default Range
A101 (Password) - -
A102 REFRIG (Refrigerant Type) Set by Unit Code R22, R407C, R410A
SHUTD SHUTD, DISAB
A103 MOTOR OL (Main Fan Overload)
(Shutdown) (Shutdown, Disable)
SHUTD SHUTD, DISAB
A104 AIR LOSS (Loss of Airflow)
(Shutdown) (Shutdown, Disable)
A105 # COMP (Number of Compressors) 2 0 (CW), 1, 2
COMP DLY (Compressor Delay
A106 0 sec 0 – 120 seconds
Time)
COMP ON (Compressor Min ON
A107 3 min 0 – 5 minutes
Time)
COMP OFF (Compressor Min OFF
A108 3 min 0 – 5 minutes
Time)
A109 PUMPDOWN (Pump Down) NO (No) NO, YES (Yes, No)
NO, 4STEP,HGBP,
DS, DS+TH, SC HG
4STEP
A110 CAP TYPE (Capacity Control Type) (No, 4step, HGBP,
(4 Step)
Digital, Digital + TH,
SC – HGBP)
147

Menu Parameter
Default Range
A112 (Password) - -
A113 DS CYCLE (Digital Scroll Cycle) 15 sec No, 9 – 30 Seconds
33 – 392°F
A114 DS HT (High Temp Digital Scroll) 268°F / 131°C
(1 – 200°C)
33 – 392°F
A115 DS SWB (Digital Scroll Switchback) 250°F / 121°C
(1 – 200°C)
LP TYPE (Low Pressure Device ANLOG, SWTCH
A116 ANLOG (Analog)
Type) (Analog, Switch)
LP PH1 (Low Pressure Threshold 0 – 160 psi
A117 See Note 1
Phase 1) (0.0 – 11.0 bar)
LP PH2 (Low Pressure Threshold 0 – 160 psi
A118 See Note 2
Phase 2) (0.0 – 11.0 bar)
A119 LC PRE (Liquid Control Pre-time) 0 0.0 – 2.0 sec
A120 LC POST (Liquid Control Post-time) 0 0.0 – 10.0 sec
CHARGE P (Loss of Charge R22 and R407C: 0 – 160 psi

A121
Protection) 20 psi (1.4 bar) (0.0 – 11.0 bar)
SUP CYC / REM CYC (Sup / Rem

A122 1 Sec / 1 Sec 1 – 300 Seconds
Temp Cycle Average)
Note: Menu lines A119 and A120 are for electrically actuated ball type Water / Glycol
regulating valves supplied with digital scroll compressors.
Note 1: Low Pressure Threshold Phase 1 is determined by the heat rejection type
selected at menu line A132:
R22 and R407C with Fan Speed condenser = 35 psi (2.4 bar)
R22 and R407C with Lee-Temp condenser = 35 psi (2.4 bar)
R22 and R407C Water / Glycol unit = 50 psi (3.4 bar).
If menu line A132 is changed, menu line A117 is updated automatically.
Note 2: Low Pressure Threshold Phase 2 is determined by the combination of programs

selected at menu lines A102 (Refrigerant Type) + A137 (Cooling Type) + S408 (Hot Water
Reheat).
R22 (A102) + No FreeCooling + No Hotwater Reheat = 35 psi (2.4 bar)

R22 (A102) + Yes FreeCooling + No Hotwater Reheat = 46 psi (3.2 bar)
R22 (A102) + No FreeCooling + Yes Hotwater Reheat = 48 psi (3.3 bar)
R22 (A102) + Yes FreeCooling + Yes Hotwater Reheat = 48 psi (3.3 bar)
R407C (A102) + No FreeCooling + No Hotwater Reheat = 39 psi (2.7 bar)
R407C (A102) + Yes FreeCooling + No Hotwater Reheat = 48 psi (3.3 bar)
R407C (A102) + No FreeCooling + Yes Hotwater Reheat = 52 psi (3.6 bar)
R407C (A102) + Yes FreeCooling + Yes Hotwater Reheat = 52 psi (3.6 bar)
148

Menu Parameter SMALL
Default Range
Line DISPLAY (Large Display)
A123 (Password) - -
10% / 0 – 100% /
LP1 LOW % / PSI
A124 R22: and R407C: -145 to +725 psi
(LP1 Sensor)
-15 psi (-1.0 bar) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
90% / 0 – 100% /
LP1 HIGH % / PSI
A125 R22: and R407C: -145 to +725 psi
(LP1 Sensor )
135 psi (9.3 bar) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
A126 LP1 ACT (Actual LP1 Signal) - 0 – 100%
10% / 0 – 100% /
LP2 LOW % / PSI
A127 R22: and R407C: -145 to +725 psi
(LP2 Sensor)
-15 psi (-1.0 bar) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
90% / 0 – 100% /
LP2 HIGH % / PSI
A128 R22: and R407C: -145 to +725 psi
(LP2 Sensor)
135 psi (9.3 bar) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
A129 LP2 ACT (Actual LP2 Signal) - 0 – 100%
R22 and R407C: 0 – 160 psi
A130 PD CUT (Pumpdown Cutout)
35 psi (2.4 bar) (0.0 – 11.0 bar)
PD RECYC (Pumpdown R22 and R407C: 0 – 160 psi
A131
Recycle) 65 psi (4.5 bar) (0.0 – 11.0 bar)
FSC, L-T, W/G,
HEAT REJ (Heat Rejection (AC Fanspeed,
A132 FSC ( AC Fanspeed)
Control Type) AC Lee-Temp,
Water/Glycol)
GLO COND (Global NO, YES
A133 NO (Disabled)
condenser Board) (Disabled, Enabled)
NOEEV, 1 EEV,
A13A EEV EN (EEV Enable) NO EEV (No EEV)
2 EEV
A13B EEV LP (LP with EEV) NO (No) NO, YES (No, Yes)
149
ADVANCED MENU’s Continued

Menu Parameter
Default Range
A134 (Password) - -
DEH, WNG,NOP, FC,
WNG
A135 K11 ACT (K11 Active On) (Dehum, Warning, No
(Warning)
Power, Freecooling)
A136 CW F DUR (CW Flush Duration) 0 (3) 0, 1, 2, 3 minutes
SINGL, FC, DC, ECO
SINGL
(Single Source,
A137 COOL TYPE (Cooling Type) (Single
Freecooling, Dual Cool,
Source)
Economizer)
A138 STOP FC+ (Stop FC at Setpoint + Value) 7°F (3.9°K) 2 - 180°F / 1.0 – 99.9°K
A139 FC F DUR (Freecooling Flush Duration) 0 (3) 0, 1, 2, 3 minutes
A140 FC F K11 (Freecooling Flush Starts K11) NO NO, YES
A141 COMP+FC (Comp + FC Simultaneously) YES NO, YES
A142 HW F DUR (Hot Water Flush Duration) 0 (3) 0, 1, 2, 3 minutes
A143 HG HEAT (Hot Gas Heat) NO NO, COMP1, COMP2
HEAT DEH / HEAT OP (Electric Reheat

A144 NO NO, STAGE, DELAY
Operation)
A14A HEAT #1 (1st El. Heater on Heat Output) 1 Not Selectable, 1, 2
Note: Parameter A138 is the temperature difference that parameter A370 – Status
DT3 (Room/Setpoint) will use to switch from Off to Active.
If parameter A141 is set to Yes, than the value is determined by the following
calculation:
Temperature Setpoint + Deadband + Proportion Band
If parameter A141 is set to No, than the value is determined by the following
calculation:
Temperature Setpoint + Deadband + ½ Proportion Band
150

Parameter
Menu
Line
(Large Display)
A145 (Password) - -
NO, EXT, IFS, IFL, PEX6, PEX9,
PEX12, 21LLA, 53LLC, 53HLB,
93LLE, 93HLD, D3H, HT2, HT5,
HT9 SGH, 33H
HUM TYPE (No, External, IFS, IFL,
A146 NO (No)
(Humidifier Model) PeX @ 6 Amp, PeX @ 9 Amp,
PeX @ 12 Amp, 21L-CLA,
53L-CLC, 53H-CLB, 93L-CLE,
93H-CLD, D3H,HT2, HT5, HT9,
SGH, 33H)
HUM VOLT 208V, 230V, 460V, 575V 60 HZ /
A147 -
(Humidifier Voltage) 380V, 400V – 50HZ
HUM LAST (Humidity in 15 HR
A148 1 – 120 Hours
Last xxx Hours) (15 Hours)
IFS: 33 sec
A149 PREFILL (Prefill Time) IFL: 56 sec 1 – 120 seconds
Chall: 27 sec
IFS: 33 sec
A150 FILL (Fill Time) IFL: 56 sec 1 – 120 seconds
Chall: 27 sec
IFS: 440 sec
HUM ON
A151 IFL: 576 sec 60 - 3600 seconds
(Humidifier On Time)
Chall: 568 sec
DEH COMP
A152 (Dehumidification with 2 1, 2, BOTH, 1 or 2
Comp)
MAX LL1 / LL2 (Max LL1: 75°F (23.9°C)
A153 41 – 104°F (5.0 – 40.0°C)
Low Limit 1 / 2 Setpoint) LL2: 80°F (26.7°C)
151

Menu Parameter
Default Range
A156 (Password) -
ANOUT1LO / HI (Analog Output 1 Low /
A157 0V / 10V 0.0 – 10.0V
High Limit)
A158 0V / 10V 0.0 – 10.0V
High Limit)
A159 0V / 10V 0.0 – 10.0V
High Limit)
A160 0V / 10V 0.0 – 10.0V
High Limit)
MIN DEH / MIN HEAT / MIN HUM (Min
A161 100% 0 – 100%
Dehum / Min Heat / Min Hum Fanspeed)
A162 FAN MODE (EC-Fan Mode) Full Full, Light
A163 ANLOUT1 (Analog Output 1) Hot Water 1.75 See Note
A164 ANLOUT2 (Analog Output 2) CW/FC 1.75 See Note
A165 ANLOUT3 (Analog Output 3) Cooling See Note
A166 ANLOUT4 (Analog Output 4) Heating See Note
Note: The user can select labels for Analog Outputs 1 – 4 as follows:
CW010 (CW/FC 0-10V) MBV1 (MBV 1) RET (Return Temp)

HW (Hot water) MBV2 (MBV 2) HUMI (Humidifier)
HW175 (Hot Water 1.75) SCR (SCR) SUPSA (Supersaver)
VSD (Var SpeedDrive) CONF (Configurable) INVCO (Inverted Cool)
COOL (Cooling) ALBD1 (AlarmBoard 1) HEAT3 (Heating 33%)
CW175 (CW/FC 1.75) ALBD2 (AlarmBoard 2) CW210 (CW 2-10V)
COOL1 (Cooling 1) ALBD3 (AlarmBoard 3) CW010 (CW2 0 -10V)
COOL2 (Cooling 2) IVAR (I-Variex) C2175 (CW2 1.75)
HEAT (Heating) HUM% (HT Hum) C2210 (CW2 2-10V)
NO (Not Used) SUP (Supply Temp)
152

Menu Parameter
Default Range
A167 (Password) - -
A01 STA % / A01 STA V 0% / -100% to 100% /
A168
(Analog Output 1 Start Point) 0.0V 0.0 – 10.0V
A01 END % / A01 END V 100% / -100 to 100% /
A169
(Analog Output 1 End Point) 10.0V 0.0 – 10.0V
A02 STA % / A02 STA V 0% / -100 to 100% /
A170
A02 END % / A02 END V 100% / -100 to 100% /
A171
A03 STA % / A03 STA V 0% / -100 to 100% /
A172
A03 END % / A03 END V 100% / -100 to 100% /
A173
A04 STA % / A04 STA V 0% / -100 to 100% /
A174
A04 END % / A04 END V 100% / -100 to 100% /
A175
153

Menu Parameter
SMALL DISPLAY (Large Default Range
Line
A178 (Password)Display) - -
10% / 0 – 100% /
LL1 LOW % / LL1 LOW PSI
A179 R22 and R407C: -145 to +725psi
(LL1 Sensor)
0 psi (0.0 bar) (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
90% / 0 – 100% /
LL1 HIGH % / LL1 HIGH PSI
A180 R22 and R407C: -145 to +725psi
(LL1 Sensor)
500 psi (34.5 bar) (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
LL1 ACT % (Actual LL1
A181 - 0 – 100%
Signal)
LL1 ACT PSI (Actual LL1 -145 / +725psi
A182 -
Pressure) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
10% / 0 – 100% /
LL2 LOW % / LL2 LOW PSI
A183 R22 and R407C: -145 to +725psi
(LL2 Sensor)
0 psi (0..0 bar) (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
90% / 0 – 100% /
LL2 HIGH % / LL2 HIGH PSI
A184 R22 and R407C: -145 to +725psi
(LL2 Sensor)
500 psi (34.5 bar) (-10.0 to +50.0 bar)
LL 2 ACT % (Actual LL2 - 0 – 100%
A185
Signal)
LL2 ACT PSI (Actual LL2 -145 / +725psi
A186 -
Pressure) (-10.0 to 50.0 bar)
REM SHUT (Remote CLS, OPN, NO
A187 CLS (Closed)
Shutdown) (Closed, Open, No)
MM OVR (Manual Mode
A188 NO NO, YES (No, Yes)
Override S313)
154

Parameter Default: All
Menu
SMALL DISPLAY (Large Compressor Range
Line
Display) Types
A189 (Password) -
LP F CUR (Low Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A190
FAN CUR Act / Set) 56 psi (3.8 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
LP F MAX (Low Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A191
FAN MAX ACT / Set) 51 psi (3.5 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
LP C CUR (Low Pressure R22and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A192
Comp CUR Act / Set) 57 psi (4.0 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
LP C MIN (Low Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A193
Comp MIN Act / Set) 51 psi (3.5 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
HP F CUR (High Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A194
FAN CUR Act / Set) 206 psi (14.2 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
HP F MIN (High Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A195
FAN MIN Act / Set) 206 psi (14.2 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
HP C CUR (High Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A196
Comp CUR Act / Set) 84 psi (5.8 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
HP C MAX (High Pressure R22 and R407C: 0 to 290 psi
A197
Comp MAX Act / Set) 95 psi (6.6 bar) (0.0 to 20.0 bar)
FP HYST (Freeze Protection R22 and R407C: 0 to 73 psi
A198
Hysteresis) 3 psi (0.2 bar) (0.0 to 5.0 bar)
FP CAP C / FP CAP F (Cap
A199 0.60% / 0.20% 0.01 – 100.00%
Filter Comp / Fan)
4STP MIN (4 Step LP
A19A 5 min 0 – 20 minute
Control Min Time)
TNDEL LP / TNDL HP
A19B 180 sec / 180 sec 0 – 600 seconds
(Tandem SPM Del LP / HP)
155

Condenser Control Parameters, page 1 of 2
Menu Parameter
A701 (Password)
A702 (Condenser Set Point Pressure)
A703 (Condenser Dead Band Pressure)
A704 (Current Condenser Pressure)
A705 (Current Condenser Output %)
A706 (Control In Manual Mode)
A707 (Current Condenser Output Set %)
A708 (Condenser Cut Off Pressure)
A709 (Condenser Cut Off Hysteresis Pressure)
A710 (Compressor High Pressure Warning At)
A711 (Compressor High Pressure Warning Hysteresis)
Condenser Control Parameters, page 2 of 2

Menu Parameter
A712 (Password)
A713 (Low Comp Capacity At Pressure)
A714 (Low Comp Capacity For xx Minutes)
A715 (Reset Low Camp Capacity At Pressure)
A716 (Condenser Start Output Value At %)
A717 (Condenser Start Time Value At xx Seconds)
A718 (Minimum Condenser Output Signal DCV)
A719 (Maximum Condenser Output Signal DCV)
A720 (Filter – Condenser Integral Step Value %)
A721 (Condenser Type)
(Condenser Pressure Control Timer Reading
A722
Interval xx Seconds)
156

Global Condenser Control Parameters, page 1 of 13
Menu Parameter
A801 (Password)
A802 (Select Condenser 2 / Select Condenser 1)
A803 (Firmware Version)
A804 (IP Address)
A805 (Netmask)
A806 (Gateway)
A807 (Condenser Model Identification)
A808 (Refrigerant Type)
A809 (VSD Model Identification)
A810 (Refrigerant Liquid Pressure)
A811 (Refrigerant Liquid Temperature)
A812 (Ambient Temperature)
A813 (Status of Indoor Unit Compressor 1 or 2)

Menu Parameter
A814 (Password)
A816 (Fan Speed Control By)
A817 (Condenser Pressure Control Set Point Act / Set)
A818 (Refrigerant Temperature Control Set Point)
A822 (VSD Fan Speed STD)
A823 (VSD Fan Speed MAX)
A824 (VSD Fan Speed MIN)
A825 (VSD Fan Speed Request)
A826 (VSD Fan Cut-Off Speed)
157

Menu Parameter
A827 (Password)
A829 (Status Motor Overload Status)
A830 (Status Remote Shutdown Status)
A831 (Status Spare C1 – C1 Input State)
A832 (Status TVSS State)
A833 (Status PCB Alarm State)
A834 (Status Fan Contactor 1 – 4)
A835 (Used Voltage Fan 1 – 4)
A836 (Absorbed Current Fan 1 - 4)
A837 (Absorbed Power Fan 1 -4)
A838 (Internal VSD Motor Temperature Fan 1 - 4)
A839 (Actual VSD Speed Fans 1 – 4)

Menu Parameter
A840 (Password)
A842 (Absolute MAX Pressure 1 / Absolute MAX Pressure 2)
A843 (Absolute MIN Pressure Act / Set Condenser 1 / 2)
A844 (Pressure Event Time Delay Condenser 1 / 2)
A845 (Pressure Calibration Offset Condenser 1 / 2)
A846 (High Pressure Alarm Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A847 (High Pressure Alarm Reset Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A848 (Low Pressure Alarm Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A849 (Low Pressure Alarm Reset Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A850 (Absolute MAX Refrigerant Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A851 (Absolute MIN Refrigerant Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A852 (Refrigerant Temperature Event Time Delay Condenser 1 / 2)
158

Menu Parameter
A853 (Password)
A855 (High Refrigerant Temperature Alarm Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A856 (High Refrigerant Temperature Alarm Reset Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A857 (Low Refrigerant Temperature Alarm Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A858 (Low Refrigerant Temperature Alarm Reset Value Condenser 1 / 2)
A859 (Absolute MAX Ambient Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A860 (Absolute MIN Ambient Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A861 (Ambient Temperature Event Time Delay Condenser 1 / 2)
A862 (Ambient Temperature Calibration Offset Condenser 1 / 2)
A863 (Override MAX Condenser Fan Speed at Pressure 1 / 2)
A864 (Override Condenser Fan Speed Stops at Delta Pressure 1 / 2)
A865 (Override MAX Alarm Reset Value Condenser 1 / 2)

Menu Parameter
A866 (Password)
(Default Ambient Temperature Value on Sensor Failure
A868
Condenser 1 / 2)
A869 (High Ambient Temperature Alarm Set Point Value Condenser 1 / 2)
(High Ambient Temperature Alarm Reset Differential Value
A870
Condenser 1 / 2)
A871 (Low Ambient Temperature Alarm Set Point Value Condenser 1 / 2)
(Low Ambient Temperature Alarm Reset Differential Value
A872
Condenser 1 / 2)
A873 (Condenser Operating Status Condenser 1 / 2)
A874 (Remote Shutdown Status Condenser 1 / 2)
A875 (TVSS Alarm Status Condenser 1 / 2)
A875 (VSD Overload Status Motors 1 – 4 Condenser 1 / 2)
A877 (Override Enable VSD Speed Control Condenser 1 / 2)
A878 (Lee-Temp Option Installed Condenser 1 / 2)
159

Menu Parameter
A879 (Password)
A881 (Serial Number Condenser 1 / 2)
A884 (Fan Rotation Reversal Requested Condenser 1 / 2)
A885 (Operating Mode Condenser 1 / 2)
(Efficiency Operating Mode Low Noise / High Efficiency Condenser
A886
1 / 2)
A887 (VSD Motor Shutdown at xxx Critical Fans Alarms Condenser 1 / 2)
(Fan Critical Alarm Accumulation xxx Minute Time Count
A888
Condenser 1 / 2)
A889 (Alarms Generate RS485Communications Condenser 1 / 2)
(CANBus Loss of Communication Time Value to Generate Alarm
A890
Condenser 1 / 2)
A891 (Refrigerant Sub-cooling Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)

Menu Parameter
A892 (Password)
A894 (Gain Scheduling Pressure Condenser 1 / 2)
A895 (Ambient Temperature Up to xxx Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “A” up to 23°F / -5.0°C Gain Setup Values
A896
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “B” up to 41°F / 5.0°C Gain Setup Values
A897
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “C” up to 59°F / 15.0°C Gain Setup
A898
Values Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “D” up to 77°F / 25.0°C Gain Setup
A899
Values Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature Above 77°F / 25°C Gain Setup Values
A8A1
Condenser 1 / 2)
A8A2 (Hysteresis Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A8A3 (Current Ambient Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
(Loss of Pressure Sensor Signal Default Gain Parameter Values
A8A5
Condenser 1 / 2)
160

Menu Parameter
A8A6 (Password)
A8A7 (Select Condenser 2 / Select Condenser 1)
A8A8 (Gain Scheduling Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A8A9 (Ambient Temperature Up to xxx Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “A” up to 23°F / -5.0°C Gain Setup Values
A8B1
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “B” up to 41°F / 5.0°C Gain Setup Values
A8B2
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “C” up to 59°F / 15.0°C Gain Setup Values
A8B3
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature “D” up to 77°F / 25.0°C Gain Setup Values
A8B4
Condenser 1 / 2)
(Ambient Temperature Above 77°F / 25°C Gain Setup Values
A8B5
Condenser 1 / 2)
A8B6 (Hysteresis Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
A8B7 (Current Ambient Temperature Condenser 1 / 2)
(Loss of Temperature Sensor Signal Default Gain Parameter Values
A8B9
Condenser 1 / 2)

Menu Parameter
A8C1 (Password)
A8C2 (Select Condenser 2 / Select Condenser 1)
(Reset Long Count: Number of Repeated Fault Conditions for
A8C3
Manual Rest Condenser 1 / 2)
(Reset Long Duration: Duration Time of Repeated Fault Conditions
A8C4
for Manual Rest Condenser 1 / 2)
(Reset Long Span: Time Span of Repeated Fault Conditions for
A8C5
(Reset Sort Count: Number of Repeated Fault Conditions for
A8C6
(Reset Short Duration: Duration Time of Repeated Fault Conditions
A8C7
for Manual Rest Condenser 1 / 2)
(Reset Short Span: Time Span of Repeated Fault Conditions for
A8C8
161

Parameter
(Large Display)
(Password)
(Select Condenser 2 / Select Condenser 1)
(Condenser Pressure Sensor Failure Condenser 1 / 2)
( High Condenser Pressure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Low Condenser Pressure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Condenser VSD Speed Pressure Override Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Condenser Ambient Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(High Ambient Temperature Limit Exceeded Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Low Ambient Temperature Limit Exceeded Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Condenser Refrigerant Temperature Sensor Failure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(High Condenser Temperature Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(Low Condenser Temperature Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)

Parameter
(Large Display)
(Password)
( RS485 Communications Failure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD High Link Current Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Drive Error Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Earth to Ground Fault Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Electronics Thermal Overload Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Fan 1 – 4 Failure Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD IGBT Failure Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Line Fault Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Motor Locked Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Motor Thermal Overload Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
162

Parameter
(Large Display)
(Password)
(VSD Phase Failure Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Electronics High Temperature Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD High Link Voltage Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Low Link Voltage Fan 1 – 4 Alarm Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Specific Uncategorized Alarm Detected Fan 1 – 4 Condenser 1 / 2)
(VSD Specific Uncategorized Warning Detected Fan 1 – 4 Condenser 1 / 2)
163
NOTES:
164
Chapter 3
Electrical Connections
 Display Assemblies – Plug Connections
 Small Display DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
 Large Display DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
 Control Board Connections
 Control Board DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
 Return Air Temperature – Humidity Sensor Assembly DIP
Switch and Jumper Settings
 Optional Supply Air Temperature Sensor Assembly
 Optional 2T Remote Temperature Sensor Assembly DIP Switch
and Jumper Settings
 Optional Ground Current Detect Board Connections
165
Display Assemblies – Plug Connections

Both the Large and Small display assemblies are mounted to the unit accent
panel. The large Display assembly uses one (1) CAN cable and one (1) crossover
Ethernet cable to connect to the control board. The Small Display assembly uses
one (1) CAN cable to connect to the control board
Large Display
Small Display
Large Display
Plug P64 connects to P64 on the control
board using a crossover cable.
board using a CAN cable.
Small Display
board using a CAN cable.
166
Small Display DIP Switch and Jumper Setting
Small Display DIP Switch #3 Settings

Position Type Positions
SW3 - 1 CAN Address Off
SW3 - 5 CAN Operating Mode On
SW3 - 6 CAN Operating Mode On
SW3 - 7 CAN Baud Off
Sw3 - 8 CAN Baud Off
Small Display Jumper Settings

Jumper Type Positions
P4 Position
Contrast (Software function) * Shunt Pins 1 & 2
P78 CAN Termination * Shunt on Pins 2 & 3
P80 BDM Header Open
P82 Watchdog (416821G1 – 5 Rev. 0 - 7) * Shunt on Pins 1 & 2
* Factory Default Positions and Settings
167
Large Display DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
Large Display DIP Switch #3 Settings

Position Type Positions
Large Display Jumper Settings

P4 Contrast (Software function) * Shunt on Pins 1 & 2
P8 Open Open
P13 BDM Mode Open
P18 RS232 Header Open
P80 BDM Header Open
P83 Bootloader Jumper Open
168
Control Board Connections

This section identifies the various plug connections and the terminal block
connections located on the unit control board. The tables in this section show all
of the pin connections and the reference points for signal flow through these
connections.
Unit Mounted Control Board
169
DS / VS / CW Units:
P4: 24 VAC Power
P4-1: Fuse 1 (24 VAC out Control Circuit 1)
P7: Fluid Sensor

P7-1: Aquastat Sensor
P7-3: no connection
P7-4: no connection
P8: 24 VAC Alarm Inputs

P8-1: 24 VAC (TS-50 / RAD1 to Input U16)
P8-3: 24 VAC (TS-55 / RAD3 or CPSS to Input U18)
P8-5: 24 VAC (HWA Infrared or N.C. HAR Steam Canister to Input U20)
P8-6: 24 VAC Out (TS 24)
P8-7: 24 VAC Out (HWA Infrared or N.C. HAR Steam Canister)
P11: Low Pressure Transducer Circuits

P11-1: DCV Signal to LPT1
P11-2: Cold Start Bypass 1 Signal
P11-3: MP Signal to LPT1
P11-4: LPT1 Input to MP
P11-5: DCV Signal to LPT2
P11-6: Cold Start Bypass 2 Signal
P11-7: MP Signal to LPT2
P11-8: LPT2 Input to MP
P12: Analog Sensor Inputs 3 and 4 (not available with high pressure
transducer option)
P12-1: T+ Analog 3 (TS-41)
P12-2: T- Analog 3 (TS-42)
P12-5: T+ Analog 4 (TS-43)
P12-6: T- Analog 4 (TS-44)
170
DS / VS / CW Units:
P12: Optional High Pressure Transducer Circuits
P12-1: DCV Signal to HPT1
P12-2: HTP1 Input to MP
P12-3: MP Signal to HPT1
P12-4: HPT1 Input to MP
P12-6: HTP2 Input to MP
P12-8: HPT2 Input to MP
P13: DCV Thermistor Signals

P13-1: DCV Signal to Supply Air Sensor
P13-2: DCV Signal from Supply Air Sensor
P13-3: DCV Signal to Digital Scroll Thermistor 1
P13-4: DCV Signal from Digital Scroll Thermistor 1
P13-6: DCV Signal from Digital Scroll Thermistor 2
P18: Serial Cable Plug Connection – NOT Used
P22: Glycool Valve / Chilled Water Valve (Std. Pressure Actuator)

P22-1: 24 VAC Out (from Q18 to Close Valve)
P22-2: DCV Signal (Valve feedback signal for positioning)
P22-3: 24 VAC Out (from Q17 to Open Valve)
P22-4: DCV Signal (Valve feedback signal for positioning)
P22-5: E2 (24 VAC Gnd)
P22-6: +5 VDC Out to valve
P32: Compressor Devices

P32-1: 24 VAC Out (LLSV1)
P32-2: E1 (LLSV1)
P32-3: 24 VAC Out (LLSV2)
P32-4: 24 VAC Out (OL / KL1 / HP1)
P32-5: 24 VAC Out (OL / KL2 / HP2)
P32-6: 24 VAC (from HP1 to Q14)
P32-7: 24 VAC (from HP2 to Q10)
P32-8: 24 VAC
P32-9: 24 VAC (HP1 to Input U29)
P32-10: 24 VAC Out (C1)
P32-11: E1 (C1)
P32-12: 24 VAC Out (C2)
P32-13: E2 (C2)
171
DS / VS / CW Units:
P33-1: 24 VAC Out (CUV1 / DSV1)
P33-2: E1 (CUV1 / DSV1)
P33-3: E2 (LLSV2)
P33-4: 24 VAC Out (CUV2 / DSV2)
P33-5: E2 (CUV2 / DSV2)
P33-6: 24 VAC (OL /KL1 to Input U27)
P33-7: 24 VAC (OL /KL2 to Input U24)
P33-8: 24 VAC
P33-9: 24 VAC (HP2 to Input U26)
P33-10: K11 (N.O.)
P33-11: K11 (N.O.)
P33-12: no connection
P34: Reheat Devices

P34-1: 24 VAC Out (RS1 / RS2 / RS3)
P34-2: E3 (RS1 / RS2 / RS3)
P34-3: 24 VAC (from GCD / BR)
P34-4: 24 VAC Out (RH1 / HGRS / SCR1 / SCR2)
P34-6: 24 VAC Out (RH2)
P34-8: 24 VAC Out (RH3)
P34-10: E3 (RH1 / HGRS / RH2 / RH3 / SCR1 / SCR2)
P34-12: 24 VAC Out (GCD / BR)
P35: Infrared Humidifier Devices

P35-1: 24 VAC Out (H Infrared / MDS Steam Canister)
P35-2: 24 VAC (from H Infrared / HAR Steam Canister)
P35-3: 24 VAC Out (HMV)
P35-4: E4 (HMV)
P35-5: E3 (HS3 Infrared)
P35-6: 24 VAC Out (HS3 Infrared)
P35-7: 24 VAC Out (Fuse / MDS Steam Canister)
172
DS / VS / CW Units:
P36: Basic Unit Connections
P36-1: 24 VAC Out (Filter Clog)
P36-2: 24 VAC (Filter Clog Input U21
P36-3: 24 VAC Out (MF1, MF2, MF3)
P36-4: 24 VAC Out (AS Switch)
P36-5: 24 VAC (AS Input U15)
P36-6: 24 VAC (MF Overload Input U22)
P36-7: 24 VAC
P36-8: E4 (MF)
P36-10: E2
P36-13: K3 (Common TS-75)
P36-14: K3 (N.O. TS-76 / 1R3)
P36-15: K3 (N.C.)
P38: Smoke Detector

P38-1: 24 VAC Out (SDC connection 5)
P38-2: E4 (SDC connection G5)
P38-3: 24 VAC (Input to U16 from SDC connection 50)
P39: High Temperature Stat and Remote Shutdown

P39-1: 24 VAC Out (jumper or Optional HTS)
P39-2: 24 VAC Return (jumper or Optional HTS)
P39-3: 24 VAC Out (RDS1 – 3 / TS-37A)
P39-4: 24 VAC Return (RSD1 – 3 / TS-38A Input to U23)

P40-1: 24 VAC (no connection)
P40-7: 24 VAC Out (Optional CPAR)
P40-8: E4 (Optional CPAR)
P40-10: E4 (no connection)
P40-12: 24 VAC Out (MF Ovld, Optional EC Fans)
P40-13: 24 VAC Out (P36-3)
173
DS / VS / CW Units:
P43: T6 Transformer Secondary (Power to Rectifier Circuit)
P43-1: 24 VAC Gnd
P43-2: 24 VAC
P51: Optional Hot Water Reheat

P51-1: 24 VAC Out
P51-2: -VDC Gnd
P51-3: 0 –10 VDC Signal out to H.W. Motor
P51-4: 24 VAC Gnd (E3)
P51: Optional EC Fan(s)

P51-2: -VDC Gnd
P51-3: 0 –10 VDC Signal out to EC Fan Motor(s)
P51-4: 24 VAC Gnd (E3)
P52: Glycool Valve / Chilled Water Valve (Opt. Pressure Modulating)

P52-1: 24 VAC Out
P52-2: -VDC Gnd
P52-3: Mod Valve (0 – 10.0 VDC)
P52-4: 24 VAC Gnd (E1)
P53: Water / Glycol with Motorized Ball Valve #1 (MBV-1)

P53-1: 24 VAC Out to MVB-1
P53-2: Cable Shield
P53-3: Variable DCV Signal to MVB-1
P53-4: E4 (24 VAC Gnd)
P54: Water / Glycol with Motorized Ball Valve #2 (MBV-2)

P54-2: Cable shield
P54-3: Variable DCV Signal to MVB-2 Signal from MP
P54-4: E4 (24 VAC Gnd)
P61: Optional Intellislot 12 VDC Power Supply, connect only if optional device is
used.
174
DS / VS / CW Units:
P63: NOT Used
P64: Ethernet Port

Connects the Large Display to the Control Board using a crossover cable or
connects the Control Board to the switch using a straight patch cable when
networking.
P65: Site Monitoring Signals when the Intellislot is not used

P65-1: +5 VDC to TS-78
P65-2: -5 VDC to TS-77
Must be re-connected to the optional Intellislot for communications when used.
P66: Unit Display Power CAN Bus Connection (Digital Signal).
P67: Temperature/Humidity Assembly Power CAN Bus Connection (Digital

Signal).
TB1: 24 VAC
TB1-1: 24 VAC -T2
TB1-2: 24 VAC - T3
TB1-3: 24 VAC - T4
TB1-4: 24 VAC - T5 (Wired to P36-13 – R3 Option)
TB1-5: E1 - G2
TB1-6: E2 - G3
TB1-7: E3 - G4
TB1-8: E4 - G5 (Optional R3)
E1 / E2 / E3 / E4 / G5: Transformer Grounds
Test Points for DC Voltage on Control Board

TP1: DC Gnd
TP2: DC Gnd
TP3: DC Gnd – A out
TP4: + 3.3 VDC
TP5: + 12 VDC
TP6: + 5 VDC
TP7: + 12 VDC – A out
TP8: not used
TP10: not used
175
Challenger3000:
P4: 24 VAC Power
P7: Fluid Sensor

P7-3: no connection
P7-4: no connection
P8: 24 VAC Alarm Inputs

P8-3: 24 VAC (TS-55 / RAD3 or CPSS to Input U18)
P8-5: 24 VAC (HWA or N.C. HAR Steam Canister to Input U20)
P8-6: 24 VAC Out (TS-24)
P8-7: 24 VAC Out (HWA Infrared / N.C. HAR Steam Canister)
P11: Not Used
P12: Analog Sensor 1 and 2 Inputs

P12-1: T+ Analog 1 (TS-41)
P12-2: T- Analog 1 (TS-42)
P12-5: T+ Analog 2 (TS-43)
P12-6: T- Analog 2 (TS-44)
P12: Optional High Pressure Transducer Circuits

P12-2: HTP1 Signal Input to MP
P12-4: HPT1 Signal Input to MP
176
Challenger3000:
P13: DCV Thermistor Signals
P13-1: no Connection
P13-4: DCV Signal from Digital Scroll Thermistor 1 to MP
P18: Serial Cable Plug Connection – NOT Used
P22: Glycool Valve / Chilled Water Valve (Std. Pressure Actuator)

P22-1: 24 VAC Out (from Q18 to Close Valve)
P22-2: DCV Signal (Valve feedback signal for positioning) connection
P22-3: 24 VAC Out (from Q17 to Open Valve)
P22-4: DCV Signal ((Valve feedback signal for positioning)
P22-5: E2 (24 VAC Gnd)
P22-6: +5 VDC Out to Valve

P32-1: 24 VAC Out (LLSV1 / R2 / R6 / AR – Fan Coil Unit)
P32-2: E1 (LLSV1 / R2 / R6 / AR – Fan Coil)
P32-3: 24 VAC Out (LLSV2 Part Coil Operation)
P32-4: 24 VAC Out (OL / HP1 / LP1 / R2 Contact)
Or 24 VAC Out (TS-2, R2 Coil - Fan Coil Remote Cond Module)
P32-5: 24 VAC (N.O. AR Contact – Fan Coil Unit)
P32-6: 24 VAC Input (from HP1 to Q14)
Or (TS-1 / R2 Coil – Fan Coil Unit)
P32-8: 24 VAC Input (LP1 / N.O. R2 / N.O. AR to Input U28)
P32-9: 24 VAC Input (HP1 to Alarm U29)
Or (from TS-3, R2 Contact – Fan coil Unit to Input U29)
P32-10: 24 VAC Out (Q14 to C1 / FR1 / FR2)
Or (jumper to P32-11 – Fan Coil Unit)
P32-11: E1 (C1 / FR1 / FR2)
177
Challenger3000:
P33-1: 24 VAC Out (DSV1 / HGBP1 / TS-4 Fan Coil Remote Cond Module)
P33-2: E1 (DSV1 / HGBP1)
P33-3: E2 (LLSV2)
P33-6: 24 VAC Input (Compress OL Input U27)
P33-10: K11 (N.O.)
P33-11: K11 (N.O.)
P34: Reheat Devices

P34-1: 24 VAC Out (RS1 / RS2)
P34-2: E3 (RS1 / RS2)
P34-3: 24 VAC (from BR)
o connection
P34-4: 24 VAC Out (RH1 / N.O. R6 Contact, HGRS / SCR - RH1 / RH2)
P34-6: 24 VAC Out (RH2 / RH3)
P34-10: E3 (RH1 / HGRS / RH2 / RH3)
P34-12: 24 VAC Out (BR)
P35: Infrared Humidifier Devices

P35-1: 24 VAC Out (H1 Infrared Humidifier / Steam Generating Humidifier Board)
P35-2: 24 VAC (from (H1)
P35-3: 24 VAC Out (HMV)
P35-4: E4 (from HMV)
P35-5: E3 (from HS3 Infrared Humidifier / Steam Generating Humidifier Board)
P35-6: 24 VAC Out (HS3)
178
Challenger3000:
P36-1: 24 VAC Out (Filter Clog)
P36-2: 24 VAC Input (Filter Clog Input U21)
P36-3: 24 VAC Out (OL / MF)
P36-4: 24 VAC Out (AS Switch)
P36-5: 24 VAC Input (AS Input U15)
P36-6: 24 VAC (MF Overload Input U22)
P36-7: 24 VAC (from AS Switch)
P36-8: E4 (MF)
P36-13: K3 (Common: TB-75)
P36-14: K3 (N.O.: TB-76 / 1R3 or Optional R3 Relay)
P36-15: K3 (N.C.)
P38: Optional Smoke Detector

P38-1: 24 VAC Out (SDC connection 5)
P38-2: E4 (SDC connection G5)
P38-3: 24 VAC Input RAD1 (from SDC connection 50)
P39: High Temperature Stat and Remote Shutdown

P39-1: 24 VAC Out (jumper or Optional HTS)
P39-2: 24 VAC From (jumper Optional HST)
P39-3: 24 VAC Out (RDS1 - 3 / TS-37A)
P39-4: 24 VAC From (RSD1 – 3 / TS-38A Input to U23)

P40-7: 24 VAC Out (Optional CPAR)
P40-8: E4 (Optional CPAR)
P40-12: 24 VAC Out
P40-13: 24 VAC Out
179
Challenger3000:
P43: T6 Transformer Secondary (Power to Control Board Rectifier Circuit)
P43-1: 24 VAC Gnd
P43-2: 24 VAC
P51: Not Used
P52: Not Used
P53: Water / Glycol with Motorized Ball Valve (MBV)

P53-2: Cable Shield
P53-3: Variable DCV Signal to MBV MVB-1 Signal from MP
P53-4: E4 (24 VAC Gnd)
P54: Not Used
P61: Optional Intellislot 12 VDC Power Supply, connect only if optional device is
used
P63: Not Used
P64: Ethernet Port

Connects the Large Display to the Control Board using a crossover cable or
connects the Control Board to the switch using a straight patch cable when
networking. No used on unit supplied with a Small Display.
P65: Site Monitoring Signals when the Intellislot is not used

P65-1: +5 VDC to TS-78
P65-2: -5 VDC to TS-77
Must be re-connected to the optional Intellislot for communications when used.
P66: Unit Display Power CAN Bus Connection (Digital Signal).
P67: Temperature - Humidity Assembly Power CAN Bus Connection (Digital

Signal).
180
Challenger3000:
TB1 - Terminal Block: 24 VAC
TB1-1: 24 VAC - T2 (Wired to P33-6 - Fan Coil Units)
TB1-2: 24 VAC - T3
TB1-3: 24 VAC - T4 (Wired to Optional Steam Generating Humidifier Board)
TB1-4: 24 VAC - T5 (Wired to P36-13 – R3 Option)
TB1-5: E1 - G2
TB1-6: E2 - G3
TB1-7: E3 - G4
TB1-8: E4 - G5 (Optional R3)
E1 / E2 / E3 / E4 / E5: Transformer Grounds
Test Points for DC Voltage on Control Board

TP1: DC Gnd
TP2: DC Gnd
TP3: DC Gnd – A out
TP4: + 3.3 VDC
TP5: + 12 VDC
TP6: + 5 VDC
TP8: not used
TP10: not used
181
Control Board DIP Switch and Jumper Settings

The following section describes the control board DIP switch settings for defining
the analog inputs.
DIP Switches
Unit Mounted Control Board
182
iCOM Control Board DIP Switch Settings for Analog Input Setup
Plug Connector Input/Output Type Positions
P7-1 (+) / P7-2 (-) NTC Thermistor * Software (ASW1 = 1)
PTC Thermistor Software (ASW1 = 0)
P11-1 (+) / P11-2 (-) Analog Voltage: 0 to +5V * Sw2-1: On / Sw2-2: Off
Analog Voltage: 0 to +10V Sw2-1: Off / Sw2-2: Off
Analog Current: 4 to 20mA Sw2-1: On / Sw2-2: On
P11-3 (+) / P11-4 (-) +5V Output None
P11-7 (+) / P11-8 (-) +5V Output None
P12-3 (+) / P12-4 (-) +5V Output None
P12-7 (+) / P12-8 (-) +5V Output None
P13-1 (+) / P13-2 (-) NTC Thermistor * Software (ASW2 = 1)
PTC Thermistor Software (ASW2 = 0)
P13-3 (+) / P13-4 (-) NTC Thermistor Sw2-9: On
NTC Scroll Thermistor * Sw2-9: Off
P13-5 (+) / P13-6 (-) NTC Thermistor Sw2-10: On
NTC Scroll Thermistor * Sw2-10: Off
iCOM Control Board Jumper Settings

P19 Watchdog *Shunt on Pins 1 & 2
P78 CAN Bus Terminator *Shunt on Pins 1 & 2
P83 Bootloader *No Shunt
183
Fuse Board Plug Connections

The Liebert unit is supplied with one of two (2) styles of fuse board. The fuse
board receives the secondary voltage from transformer T1 and distributes it to the
isolation transformer T6 and the unit control board supplied. The fuse board is
located in the low voltage section of the unit. The fuse board connections are
described below
Fuse Board
P4: 24 VAC Power

P4-1: Fuse 1 P4-3: Fuse 3
P24: T1 Transformer – Line Voltage Primary 24VAC Secondary

P24-1: 24 VAC Gnd (T1) P24-2: 24 VAC (T1)
P41: 24 VAC Power – T6 Isolation Transformer

P41-1: 24 VAC Gnd (T6 Primary) P41-3: 24 VAC Gnd (T6 Secondary)
P41-2: 24 VAC (T6 Primary) P41-4: 24 VAC (T6 Secondary)
P42: Intellislot – NOT USED

P43-1: 24 VAC P43-2: 24 VAC
P44: Jumper
E1: Transformer Secondary Ground (unit ground)
Fuse Identification
F1: 24 VAC - Compressor #1 control / safety circuits
F3: 24 VAC – Reheat / Humidifier control / safety circuits
F4: 24 VAC – Start / Main Fan / control / safety circuits
F5: 24 VAC – Primary Transformer T6
184
Global Fuse Board Plug Connections
Fuse Board
P4: 24 VAC Power


P24-1: 24 VAC Gnd (T1)
P24-2: 24 VAC (T1)
P41: 24 VAC Power – T6 Isolation Transformer

P41-1: 24 VAC Gnd (T6 Primary)
P41-2: 24 VAC (T6 Primary)
P41-3: 24 VAC Gnd (T6 Secondary)
P41-4: 24 VAC (T6 Secondary)
P42: No Plug supplied on board

P45-1: Jumpered to P45-2
P45-2: Jumpered to P45-1
P45-3: 24 VAC Gnd
P45-4: 24 VAC
Fuse Identification
F3: 24 VAC – Air Safety Switch, Optional Reheat / Humidifier control / safety circuits
F4: 24 VAC – Start / Main Fan / control / safety circuits
F5: 24 VAC – Primary Transformer T6
185
Return Air Temperature - Humidity Assembly Plug

Connections
The temperature - humidity assembly is supplied on all systems with iCOM
controls. The cable is plugged into Plug P67 on the unit microprocessor board
and transmits information using “CAN” – Controlled Area Network communication.
Troubleshooting is accomplished by observing an LED located on the board. If the
LED is glowing the board is good. The temperature and humidity board is typically
located in the unit return.
Humidity Temperature
Sensor Sensor
Power
Supply
CAN Bus Connectors
Temperature - Humidity Board
P67: Return Air Temperature - Humidity Board

P67-1: CAN communication
P67-6: CAN communication
Standard Return Air Housing Optional Remote Sensor A,

B and C Housing
186
Return Air Temperature – Humidity Assembly

DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
Jumper P4 Jumper P2
Jumper P3
DIP Switch #1
Temperature - Humidity Board DIP Switch #1 Settings

SW1 - 1 SW1 - 2 SW1 - 3 SW1 - 4 SW1 - 5 SW1 - 6 Comments
Off Off Off Off On Off Return T/H Sensor
On Off Off Off On Off Optional Sensor A
Off On Off Off On Off Optional Sensor B
On On Off Off On Off Optional Sensor C
Temperature - Humidity Board Jumper Settings

P2 BDM Header * Open
P4 Programming * Open
E10 – E13 Serial Port * Open
Jumper P3 CAN Bus Termination: The correct position of this jumper is

dependent on your environment. If the board is physically the first or last node on
the CAN Bus, the jumper needs to be shunted across pins 2 – 3 (Default position).
Otherwise position the shunt across pins 1 – 2.
187
Optional Supply Air Temperature Sensor

The iCOM control system may include an optional supply air temperature sensor.
This sensor is to be field installed in the unit supply (discharge) beneath the raised
floor. It can be programmed for read only values, alarm activation or control as
discussed earlier in this manual.
Supply Air Temperature Sensor
Placement of Factory Supplied and Field Installed Optional Supply

Temperature Sensor
188
Optional Remote 2T - Temperature Sensor

Assembly DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
DIP Switches
Jumper P3
2T Temperature Assembly Housing
2T Board DIP Switch #1 Settings

SW1 - 1 SW1 - 2 SW1 - 3 SW1 - 4 SW1 - 5 SW1 - 6 Assembly ID
Off Off On Off On Off Sensor 1
On Off On Off On Off Sensor 2
Off On On Off On Off Sensor 3
On On On Off On Off Sensor 4
Off Off Off On On Off Sensor 5
On Off Off On On Off Sensor 6
Off On Off On On Off Sensor 7
On On Off On On Off Sensor 8
Off Off On On On Off Sensor 9
Off On On On On Off Sensor 10
Jumper P3
* Default Setting: Jumper P3 CAN Bus Termination: The correct position of this
jumper is dependent on your environment. If the board is physically the last node
on the CAN Bus, the jumper needs to be shunted across pins 2 – 3. Otherwise
position the shunt across pins 1 – 2.
The 2T assemblies are field installed on the server rack enclosures and connected
to the unit control board.
189
Optional Ground Current Detect Board Plug

Connections – Electric Reheat
Ground Current Detector Board (GCD)
The Ground Current Detector Board “GCD” is supplied on some units with the
optional electric reheat. The GCD detects reheat leakage current and shuts down
the operation of the reheat by de-energizing the Backup Reheat Contactor
identified as “BR” on the schematic. The GCD circuit board has a green LED that
glows steadily to indicate that the reheat is operating properly. A red LED will glow
to indicate that the reheat has failed and both the reheat element and the GCD
circuit board need to be replaced.
Note: Do not remove or disable the Ground Current Detector. Failure to

leave the GCD in place could result in either smoke or fire.
P101: 24 VAC Load Device

24H: 24 VAC (from P2-3)
24G: 24 VAC Common (from P2-4)
P102: 24 VAC Load Device

24DH: 24 VAC Out (BR)
24DG: 24 VAC Return (BR)
P103: Current Coil Device

CT1: Current Transformer
CT2: Current Transformer
190
NOTES:
191
Chapter 4
General Data
 Isolation
 Control Board Opto-Isolators and Triac Legend
 Control Input check (Aquastat Sensor)
 Diagnostics – Service Mode
 Moisture Content Charts
 Transducer Information
 Digital Scroll High Temperature NTC Sensor Chart
 Basic Psychrometric Notes
 Unit Configuration Code Definitions
192
Isolation
We use the opto-isolator and the triac to isolate areas of control and voltage.
There are three areas of control and two voltage levels. Digital control comes from
the microprocessor at 3.3 VDC and the other voltage level is 24 VAC. One
voltage is used to turn on the triac and the other is used to operate the load
device.
DIGITAL CONTROL POWER
Processor
Transformer
3.3 VDC Signal TRIAC
Power 24 VAC
OPTO
Load
Device
3.3 VDC Transformer

Ground Power 24 VAC
ISOLATION ISOLATION
Areas of Control
193
Microprocessor Control Board: Typical Location of

the Opto-Isolators and Triacs
Input Opto-Islators Output Opto-Isolators and Triacs
Unit Control Board
194
DS / VS / CW Input Opto-Isolator Status / Alarm Legend
Opto Purpose
U15 Air Safety Switch (AS)
U16 Custom Alarm 1 (RAD1 / SDC)
U17 Custom Alarm 2 (RAD2)
U18 Custom Alarm 3 (RAD3 / CPSS)
Humidifier Problem Infrared (Humidifier
U20
Alarm Relay Steam Canister)
U21 Filter Clog Switch (FC)
U22 Main Fan Overload (MF OL)
U23 Power On (Remote Shutdown Device)
U24 Compressor 2 Overload (OL / KL2)
U25 Low Pressure Switch 2 (LP2)
U26 High Head Pressure 2 (HP2)
U27 Compressor 1 Overload (OL / KL1)
U28 Low Pressure Switch 1 (LP1)
U29 High Head Pressure 1 (HP1)
The input opto-isolators located in the lower left hand area of the control board are
used to indicate system alarms. A green LED located to the right of each opto-
isolator illuminates when the input is energized. Based on the normal position of
the input to the control an illuminated LED can indication either an alarm or normal
operating condition.
As an example:
U22 - Main Fan Overload: if the LED is glowing there is no alarm condition and
the fans are operating. If the LED is not glowing this indicates a “Main Fan
Overload” alarm condition is present and the fans are de-energized.
The service technician can use these LED’s for additional troubleshooting
assistance.
195
DS / VS / CW Output Opto-Isolator and Triac Legend
Opto Triac Purpose

U1 Q1 Reheat 1 (RH1 / HGRS / SCR1 / SCR2)
U2 Q2 Reheat 2 (RH2)
U3 Q3 Reheat 3 RH3)
U4 Q4 Humidifier (H – Infrared / MDS Steam Canister)
U5 Q5 Main Fan (MF / MF1 / MF2 / MF3)
U6 Q6 Humidifier Makeup Valve (HMV Infrared)
U8 Q8 Liquid Line Solenoid 2 (LLSV2)
Cylinder Unloader Valve 2 (CUV2 – Four Step) or
U9 Q9
Digital Scroll Valve 2 (DSV2)
U10 Q10 Compressor 2 (C2)
U12 Q12 Liquid Line Solenoid 1 (LLSV1)
Cylinder Unloader Valve 1 (CUV1 – Four Step) or
U13 Q13
Digital Scroll Valve 1 (DSV1)
U14 Q14 Compressor 1 (C1)
U15 Q15 Not Used
Chilled Glycol Valve Actuator Open (CGV) or
U17 Q17
Chilled Water Valve Actuator Open (CWV)
Chilled Glycol Valve Actuator Close (CGV) or
U18 Q18
Chilled Water Valve Actuator Close (CWV)
The output opto-isolator and triacs located in the lower right hand area of the
control board are used to turn the various components used for system operation
on and off. A green LED located below the triac illuminates when the output is
energized, indicating the device should be active.
As an example:
Q5 - Main Fan Contactor: if the LED is glowing the fans should be operating. If
the LED is not glowing the device is de-activated.
assistance.
196
Challenger Input Opto-Isolator Status / Alarm Legend
Opto Purpose
U15 Air Safety Switch (AS)
U16 Custom Alarm 1 (RAD1 / SDC)
U18 Custom Alarm 3 (RAD3 / CPSS)
Humidifier Problem Infrared (Humidifier Alarm Relay
U20
Steam Canister)
U21 Filter Clog Switch (FC)
U22 Main Fan Overload MF OL)
U23 Power On (Remote Shutdown device)
U24 not used
U25 not used
U26 not used
U27 Compressor 1 Overload (Fan Coil Unit Power On)
U28 Low Pressure Switch 1 (Fan Coil Unit AR Contact)
U29 High Head Pressure 1 (Fan Coil Unit R2 Contact)
The input opto-isolators located in the lower left hand area of the control board are
used to indicate system alarms. A green LED located to the right of each opto-
isolator illuminates when the input is energized. Based on the normal position of
the input to the control an illuminated LED can indication either an alarm or normal
operating condition.
As an example:
U22 - Main Fan Overload: if the LED is glowing there is no alarm condition and
the fans are operating. If the LED is not glowing this indicates a “Main Fan
Overload” alarm condition is present and the fans are de-energized.
assistance.
197
Challenger Output Opto-Isolator and Triac Legend
Opto Triac Purpose

U1 Q1 Reheat 1 (RH1 / HGRS / SCR1 / SCR2 / HWRH)
U2 Q2 Reheat 2 (RH2 / RH3)
U3 Q3 not used
U4 Q4 Humidifier (H1 – Infrared / HR Steam Canister)
U5 Q5 Main Fan (MF)
U6 Q6 Humidifier Makeup Valve (HMV Infrared)
U8 Q8 Liquid Line Solenoid 2 (LLSV2 Part Coil Option)
U9 Q9 not used
U10 Q10 not used
Liquid Line Solenoid 1 (LLSV1) or
Cooling Relay(R2 Water / Glycol only) or
U12 Q12
Hot Gas Reheat Lockin Relay (R6) or
Fan Coil relay (AR Fan Coil units only)
Hot Gas Bypass 1 (HGBP1) or
U13 Q13 Digital Scroll Valve (DSV) or
Hot Gas Solenoid (Fan Coil units only)
Compressor 1 (C1) or
U14 Q14
Condensing Unit (Fan Coil Unit only)
U15 Q15 Not Used
Chilled Glycol Valve Actuator Open (CGV) or
U17 Q17
Chilled Water Valve Actuator Open (CWV)
Chilled Glycol Valve Actuator Close (CGV) or
U18 Q18
Chilled Water Valve Actuator Close (CWV)
The output opto-isolator and triacs located in the lower right hand area of the
control board are used to turn the various components used for system operation
on and off. A green LED located below the triac illuminates when the output is
energized, indicating the device should be active.
As an example:
Q5 - Main Fan Contactor: if the LED is glowing the fans should be operating. If
the LED is not glowing the device is de-activated.
assistance.
198
Control Input Check (Aquastat Sensor)

The iCOM control system may be supplied with the either the Glycool or Dual
Cooling option. These options are supplied with an additional sensor to provide an
input to the control board. This additional temperature sensor is attached to the
entering glycol or chilled water line at the unit. The control input check allows the
end user to better troubleshoot the glycol or dual cooling type units. The standard
return air sensor is used as an input to the unit control software program to
calculate the needed capacity. This optional sensor wired to Plug P7 on the unit
control board. The chart that follows can help to troubleshoot this circuit.
Aquastat Sensor
Use the table below to check the fluid thermistor sensor for accuracy. To read the
resistance value of the thermistor it must be electrically removed from the circuit.
Fluid Sensor Temperature to Resistance Table
Temperature Resistance Temperature Resistance

ºF (ºC) Value Ohms ºF (ºC) Value Ohms
32ºF (0.0ºC) 32,650 54ºF (12.2ºC) 17,903
34ºF (1.1ºC) 30,859 56ºF (13.3ºC) 16,990
36ºF (2.2ºC) 29,176 58ºF (14.4ºC) 16,128
38ºF (3.3ºC) 27,595 60ºF (15.6ºC) 15,315
40ºF (4.4ºC) 26,109 62ºF (16.7ºC) 14,547
42ºF (5.6ºC) 24,712 64ºF (17.8ºC) 13,823
44ºF (6.7ºC) 23,398 66ºF (18.9ºC) 13,139
46ºF (7.8ºC) 22,160 68ºF (20.2ºC) 12,492
48ºF (8.9ºC) 20,996 70ºF (21.1ºC) 11,884
50ºF (10.0ºC) 19,899 72ºF (22.2ºC) 11,309
52ºF (11.1ºC) 18,872
199
Diagnostics - Service Mode

The iCOM controller has a valuable tool built into software under the SERVICE
MENU. This program allows the service technician to evacuate and charge the
refrigerant circuit during installation, to turn on / off all loads (outputs) for testing,
and allows the technician to check the status of the control inputs.
The procedure is as follows:
1. From the main screen select the SERVICE MENU parameters.

2. In the SERVICE MENU screen select the SERVICE icon.
3. Enter password and scroll to MANUAL MODE, select YES with the up key.
4. Now scroll to Fan On and select ON with the up key. The fan must be on to
operate loads in this mode. You must turn off the fan and service mode when
completed.
The Compressor 1 and 2 selections are for the ON / OFF and RUN, EVACUATE,
and CHARGE modes.
When the user scrolls to the Compressor 1 or 2 positions in the parameters list he
must press enter to select the first item. Enter again will move the cursor to the
ON / OFF selection first (far right item) then using the up arrow key the
compressor may be turn on and down key will turn off. Now with the cursor on the
ON / OFF position, now use the right arrow key to select the RUN, EVACUATE,
CHARGE function and the up or down arrow key to make changes. The RUN
selection is the normal operating position.
200
Moisture Content Charts

The following charts show moisture content of various levels of relative humidity
for given temperatures. Follow the procedures below to use the charts:
STEP 1: Locate the chart for the temperature with which you are working.
STEP 2: Locate the line with the relative humidity value you are using.
STEP 3: Read the moisture content of the relative humidity in either grains
per cubic foot or grains per pound of air.
For example, you have a room temperature of 70F and 50% relative humidity.
STEP 1: Locate the chart for 70F.
STEP 2: Locate the line with relative humidity 50%.
STEP 3: Read the moisture content value of 50% relative humidity (4.0275
grains per cubic foot of air OR 55.86143 grains per pound of air).
201
Moisture Content at Temperature = 80F (26.7ºC)

RH Grains Per Cu Ft Grains Per Lb.
35 3.864 53.59368
36 3.9744 55.12493
37 4.0848 56.65618
38 4.1952 58.18743
39 4.3056 59.71868
40 4.416 61.24992
41 4.5264 62.78116
42 4.6368 64.31241
43 4.7472 65.84367
44 4.8576 67.37492
45 4.968 68.90616
46 5.0784 70.43741
47 5.1888 71.96865
48 5.2992 73.4999
49 5.4096 75.03115
50 5.52 76.5624
51 5.6304 78.09365
52 5.7408 79.6249
53 5.8512 81.15615
54 5.9616 82.68739
55 6.072 84.21864
56 6.1824 85.74989
57 6.2928 87.28112
58 6.4032 88.81239
59 6.5136 90.34362
60 6.624 91.87488
61 6.7344 93.40612
62 6.8448 94.93738
63 6.9552 96.46862
64 7.0656 97.99987
65 7.176 99.53111
202

35 3.7485 51.9917
36 3.8556 53.47717
37 3.9627 54.96265
38 4.0698 56.44813
39 4.1769 57.9336
40 4.284 59.41908
41 4.3911 60.90456
42 4.4982 62.39004
43 4.6053 63.87551
44 4.7124 65.36099
45 4.8195 66.84647
46 4.9266 68.33194
47 5.0337 69.81742
48 5.1408 71.3029
49 5.2479 72.78838
50 5.355 74.27385
51 5.4621 75.75933
52 5.5692 77.2448
53 5.6763 78.73028
54 5.7834 80.21575
55 5.8905 81.70123
56 5.9976 83.18671
57 6.1047 84.67218
58 6.2118 86.15767
59 6.3189 87.64314
60 6.426 89.12862
61 6.5331 90.6141
62 6.6402 92.09958
63 6.7473 93.58504
64 6.8544 95.07052
65 6.9615 96.55601
203

35 3.633 50.38971
36 3.7368 51.82942
37 3.8406 53.26913
38 3.9444 54.70883
39 4.0482 56.14854
40 4.152 57.58824
41 4.2558 59.02795
42 4.3596 60.46765
43 4.4634 61.90736
44 4.5672 63.34707
45 4.671 64.78677
46 4.774801 66.22648
47 4.8786 67.66618
48 4.9824 69.10589
49 5.0862 70.5456
50 5.19 71.9853
51 5.2938 73.425
52 5.3976 74.86471
53 5.5014 76.30441
54 5.605201 77.74413
55 5.709 79.18383
56 5.812801 80.62335
57 5.9166 82.06325
58 6.0204 83.50295
59 6.1242 84.94265
60 6.228 86.38236
61 6.3318 87.82207
62 6.4356 89.26176
63 6.5394 90.70148
64 6.6432 92.14118
65 6.747 93.58089
204

35 3.521 48.83628
36 3.6216 50.2316
37 3.7222 51.62691
38 3.8228 53.02224
39 3.9234 54.41756
40 4.024 55.81288
41 4.124601 57.20821
42 4.2252 58.60353
43 4.3258 59.99885
44 4.4264 61.39417
45 4.527 62.78949
46 4.6276 64.18481
47 4.7282 65.58013
48 4.8288 66.97546
49 4.9294 68.37078
50 5.03 69.7661
51 5.1306 71.16143
52 5.2312 72.55674
53 5.3318 73.95206
54 5.4324 75.34738
55 5.533001 76.74271
56 5.6336 78.13803
57 5.734201 79.53336
58 5.8348 80.92868
59 5.935401 82.32401
60 6.036001 83.71933
61 6.136601 85.11465
62 6.237201 86.50996
63 6.3378 87.90529
64 6.438401 89.30061
65 6.539 90.69593
205

35 3.41215 47.32652
36 3.50964 48.67871
37 3.60713 50.03089
38 3.70462 51.38307
39 3.80211 52.73527
40 3.8996 54.08745
41 3.99709 55.43964
42 4.09458 56.79182
43 4.19207 58.14401
44 4.28956 59.4962
45 4.38705 60.84838
46 4.48454 62.20057
47 4.58203 63.55276
48 4.67952 64.90494
49 4.77701 66.25713
50 4.8745 67.60931
51 4.97199 68.9615
52 5.06948 70.31368
53 5.16697 71.66587
54 5.26446 73.01805
55 5.36195 74.37024
56 5.45944 75.72243
57 5.55693 77.07461
58 5.65442 78.4268
59 5.75191 79.77898
60 5.8494 81.13118
61 5.94689 82.48336
62 6.04438 83.83555
63 6.14187 85.18773
64 6.23936 86.53992
65 6.336849 87.8921
206

35 3.3068 45.86532
36 3.40128 47.17575
37 3.49576 48.48619
38 3.59024 49.79663
39 3.68472 51.10707
40 3.7792 52.4175
41 3.87368 53.72794
42 3.96816 55.03838
43 4.06264 56.34882
44 4.15712 57.65926
45 4.251601 58.9697
46 4.34608 60.28013
47 4.44056 61.59057
48 4.53504 62.901
49 4.62952 64.21145
50 4.724 65.52188
51 4.81848 66.83231
52 4.91296 68.14276
53 5.00744 69.45319
54 5.10192 70.76363
55 5.1964 72.07407
56 5.29088 73.38451
57 5.38536 74.69495
58 5.479841 76.00539
59 5.57432 77.31581
60 5.6688 78.62625
61 5.76328 79.9367
62 5.85776 81.24713
63 5.95224 82.55757
64 6.04672 83.86801
65 6.1412 85.17844
207

35 3.20355 44.43324
36 3.29508 45.70276
37 3.38661 46.97228
38 3.47814 48.2418
39 3.56967 49.51132
40 3.6612 50.78085
41 3.75273 52.05037
42 3.84426 53.31989
43 3.93579 54.58941
44 4.02732 55.85893
45 4.11885 57.12845
46 4.21038 58.39797
47 4.30191 59.66749
48 4.39344 60.93701
49 4.48497 62.20654
50 4.5765 63.47605
51 4.66803 64.74558
52 4.75956 66.0151
53 4.85109 67.28461
54 4.94262 68.55414
55 5.03415 69.82366
56 5.12568 71.09318
57 5.21721 72.3627
58 5.30874 73.63223
59 5.40027 74.90173
60 5.4918 76.17126
61 5.58333 77.44079
62 5.67486 78.7103
63 5.76639 79.97983
64 5.85792 81.24935
65 5.94945 82.51887
208

35 3.10345 43.04485
36 3.19212 44.2747
37 3.28079 45.50456
38 3.36946 46.73441
39 3.45813 47.96426
40 3.5468 49.19412
41 3.63547 50.42397
42 3.72414 51.65382
43 3.81281 52.88367
44 3.90148 54.11352
45 3.99015 55.34338
46 4.07882 56.57323
47 4.16749 57.80309
48 4.25616 59.03294
49 4.34483 60.26279
50 4.4335 61.49264
51 4.52217 62.72249
52 4.61084 63.95235
53 4.69951 65.1822
54 4.78818 66.41206
55 4.87685 67.64191
56 4.96552 68.87176
57 5.05419 70.10161
58 5.14286 71.33146
59 5.23153 72.56132
60 5.3202 73.79117
61 5.40887 75.02102
62 5.49754 76.25087
63 5.58621 77.48073
64 5.67488 78.71058
65 5.76355 79.94044
209

35 2.9988 41.59336
36 3.08448 42.78174
37 3.17016 43.97012
38 3.25584 45.1585
39 3.34152 46.34688
40 3.4272 47.53527
41 3.51288 48.72365
42 3.59856 49.91203
43 3.68424 51.10041
44 3.76992 52.28879
45 3.8556 53.47717
46 3.94128 54.66555
47 4.02696 55.85393
48 4.11264 57.04232
49 4.19832 58.2307
50 4.284 59.41908
51 4.36968 60.60746
52 4.45536 61.79584
53 4.54104 62.98422
54 4.62672 64.17261
55 4.7124 65.36099
56 4.79808 66.54937
57 4.88376 67.73775
58 4.96944 68.92613
59 5.05512 70.11452
60 5.1408 71.30289
61 5.22648 72.49128
62 5.31216 73.67966
63 5.39784 74.86805
64 5.48352 76.05642
65 5.5692 77.2448
210

35 2.91165 40.38459
36 2.99484 41.53843
37 3.07803 42.69228
38 3.16122 43.84613
39 3.24441 44.99997
40 3.3276 46.15381
41 3.41079 47.30766
42 3.49398 48.46151
43 3.57717 49.61535
44 3.66036 50.7692
45 3.74355 51.92304
46 3.82674 53.07688
47 3.90993 54.23073
48 3.99312 55.38458
49 4.07631 56.53842
50 4.1595 57.69227
51 4.24269 58.84611
52 4.32588 59.99996
53 4.40907 61.1538
54 4.49226 62.30765
55 4.57545 63.46149
56 4.65864 64.61533
57 4.74183 65.76918
58 4.825021 66.92304
59 4.908211 68.07688
60 4.9914 69.23072
61 5.07459 70.38457
62 5.15778 71.53841
63 5.240971 72.69226
64 5.32416 73.8461
65 5.40735 74.99994
211

35 2.81925 39.103
36 2.8998 40.22023
37 2.98035 41.33746
38 3.0609 42.45469
39 3.14145 43.57192
40 3.222 44.68914
41 3.30255 45.80637
42 3.3831 46.9236
43 3.46365 48.04083
44 3.5442 49.15806
45 3.62475 50.27529
46 3.7053 51.39252
47 3.78585 52.50975
48 3.8664 53.62697
49 3.94695 54.7442
50 4.0275 55.86143
51 4.10805 56.97866
52 4.1886 58.09588
53 4.269151 59.21311
54 4.349701 60.33035
55 4.43025 61.44757
56 4.510801 62.5648
57 4.59135 63.68203
58 4.6719 64.79925
59 4.75245 65.91648
60 4.833 67.03371
61 4.91355 68.15094
62 4.994101 69.26818
63 5.074651 70.3854
64 5.1552 71.50263
65 5.23575 72.61986
212

35 2.7293 37.85539
36 2.80728 38.93697
37 2.88526 40.01856
38 2.96324 41.10014
39 3.04122 42.18173
40 3.1192 43.2633
41 3.19718 44.34489
42 3.27516 45.42647
43 3.35314 46.50805
44 3.43112 47.58964
45 3.5091 48.67122
46 3.58708 49.7528
47 3.66506 50.83438
48 3.74304 51.91596
49 3.82102 52.99755
50 3.899 54.07913
51 3.97698 55.16072
52 4.05496 56.2423
53 4.13294 57.32389
54 4.21092 58.40546
55 4.2889 59.48704
56 4.36688 60.56863
57 4.44486 61.65021
58 4.52284 62.73179
59 4.60082 63.81338
60 4.6788 64.89496
61 4.75678 65.97653
62 4.83476 67.05811
63 4.91274 68.1397
64 4.99072 69.22128
65 5.0687 70.30286
213

35 2.64985 36.75342
36 2.72556 37.80352
37 2.80127 38.85362
38 2.87698 39.90371
39 2.95269 40.95381
40 3.0284 42.00391
41 3.10411 43.05401
42 3.17982 44.10411
43 3.25553 45.1542
44 3.33124 46.2043
45 3.40695 47.2544
46 3.48266 48.30449
47 3.55837 49.35459
48 3.63408 50.40469
49 3.70979 51.45479
50 3.7855 52.50489
51 3.86121 53.55499
52 3.93692 54.60509
53 4.01263 55.65518
54 4.08834 56.70528
55 4.16405 57.75538
56 4.23976 58.80547
57 4.31547 59.85557
58 4.39118 60.90567
59 4.46689 61.95576
60 4.5426 63.00587
61 4.61831 64.05596
62 4.694021 65.10606
63 4.76973 66.15616
64 4.84544 67.20625
65 4.92115 68.25635
214

35 2.5578 35.47669
36 2.63088 36.49031
37 2.70396 37.50393
38 2.77704 38.51755
39 2.85012 39.53116
40 2.9232 40.54479
41 2.99628 41.5584
42 3.06936 42.57202
43 3.14244 43.58565
44 3.21552 44.59926
45 3.2886 45.61288
46 3.36168 46.62651
47 3.43476 47.64012
48 3.50784 48.65374
49 3.58092 49.66736
50 3.654 50.68098
51 3.72708 51.6946
52 3.80016 52.70822
53 3.87324 53.72184
54 3.94632 54.73546
55 4.0194 55.74908
56 4.09248 56.7627
57 4.16556 57.77632
58 4.238641 58.78994
59 4.31172 59.80356
60 4.3848 60.81718
61 4.45788 61.8308
62 4.53096 62.84442
63 4.60404 63.85804
64 4.67712 64.87166
65 4.750201 65.88528
215

35 2.4759 34.34073
36 2.54664 35.3219
37 2.61738 36.30306
38 2.68812 37.28422
39 2.75886 38.26539
40 2.8296 39.24655
41 2.90034 40.22772
42 2.97108 41.20888
43 3.04182 42.19005
44 3.11256 43.17121
45 3.1833 44.15237
46 3.25404 45.13354
47 3.32478 46.1147
48 3.39552 47.09587
49 3.46626 48.07703
50 3.537 49.05819
51 3.60774 50.03935
52 3.67848 51.02052
53 3.74922 52.00168
54 3.81996 52.98285
55 3.8907 53.96401
56 3.96144 54.94517
57 4.03218 55.92634
58 4.10292 56.9075
59 4.17366 57.88866
60 4.2444 58.86983
61 4.31514 59.85099
62 4.38588 60.83216
63 4.45662 61.81332
64 4.52736 62.79449
65 4.5981 63.77564
216

35 2.39575 33.22905
36 2.4642 34.17846
37 2.53265 35.12785
38 2.6011 36.07726
39 2.66955 37.02666
40 2.738 37.97606
41 2.80645 38.92546
42 2.8749 39.87486
43 2.94335 40.82426
44 3.0118 41.77366
45 3.08025 42.72307
46 3.1487 43.67247
47 3.21715 44.62187
48 3.2856 45.57127
49 3.35405 46.52067
50 3.4225 47.47008
51 3.49095 48.41947
52 3.5594 49.36888
53 3.62785 50.31828
54 3.6963 51.26768
55 3.76475 52.21708
56 3.8332 53.16648
57 3.90165 54.11589
58 3.9701 55.06528
59 4.03855 56.01469
60 4.107 56.96409
61 4.17545 57.91349
62 4.2439 58.86289
63 4.31235 59.81229
64 4.3808 60.76169
65 4.44925 61.7111
217
Transducer Information
% psig psia volts barg bara % psig psia volts barg bara
0 -33.5 -18.8 0 -2.31 -1.29 51 62.2 76.9 2.55 4.29 5.30
1 -31.6 -16.9 0.05 -2.18 -1.16 52 64.1 78.8 2.6 4.42 5.43
2 -29.7 -15.0 0.1 -2.05 -1.03 53 65.9 80.6 2.65 4.55 5.56
3 -27.8 -13.1 0.15 -1.92 -0.90 54 67.8 82.5 2.7 4.67 5.69
4 -26.0 -11.3 0.2 -1.79 -0.78 55 69.7 84.4 2.75 4.80 5.82
5 -24.1 -9.4 0.25 -1.66 -0.65 56 71.6 86.3 2.8 4.93 5.95
6 -22.2 -7.5 0.3 -1.53 -0.52 57 73.4 88.1 2.85 5.06 6.08
7 -20.3 -5.6 0.35 -1.40 -0.39 58 75.3 90.0 2.9 5.19 6.21
8 -18.5 -3.8 0.4 -1.27 -0.26 59 77.2 91.9 2.95 5.32 6.33
9 -16.6 -1.9 0.45 -1.14 -0.13 60 79.1 93.8 3 5.45 6.46
10 -14.7 0.0 0.5 -1.01 0.00 61 80.9 95.6 3.05 5.58 6.59
11 -12.8 1.9 0.55 -0.88 0.13 62 82.8 97.5 3.1 5.71 6.72
12 -11.0 3.8 0.6 -0.75 0.26 63 84.7 99.4 3.15 5.84 6.85
13 -9.1 5.6 0.65 -0.63 0.39 64 86.6 101.3 3.2 5.97 6.98
14 -7.2 7.5 0.7 -0.50 0.52 65 88.4 103.1 3.25 6.10 7.11
15 -5.3 9.4 0.75 -0.37 0.65 66 90.3 105.0 3.3 6.23 7.24
16 -3.5 11.3 0.8 -0.24 0.78 67 92.2 106.9 3.35 6.36 7.37
17 -1.6 13.1 0.85 -0.11 0.90 68 94.1 108.8 3.4 6.48 7.50
18 0.3 15.0 0.9 0.02 1.03 69 95.9 110.6 3.45 6.61 7.63
19 2.2 16.9 0.95 0.15 1.16 70 97.8 112.5 3.5 6.74 7.76
20 4.1 18.8 1 0.28 1.29 71 99.7 114.4 3.55 6.87 7.89
21 5.9 20.6 1.05 0.41 1.42 72 101.6 116.3 3.6 7.00 8.02
22 7.8 22.5 1.1 0.54 1.55 73 103.4 118.1 3.65 7.13 8.14
23 9.7 24.4 1.15 0.67 1.68 74 105.3 120.0 3.7 7.26 8.27
24 11.6 26.3 1.2 0.80 1.81 75 107.2 121.9 3.75 7.39 8.40
25 13.4 28.1 1.25 0.93 1.94 76 109.1 123.8 3.8 7.52 8.53
26 15.3 30.0 1.3 1.05 2.07 77 110.9 125.6 3.85 7.65 8.66
27 17.2 31.9 1.35 1.18 2.20 78 112.8 127.5 3.9 7.78 8.79
28 19.1 33.8 1.4 1.31 2.33 79 114.7 129.4 3.95 7.91 8.92
29 20.9 35.6 1.45 1.44 2.46 80 116.6 131.3 4 8.04 9.05
30 22.8 37.5 1.5 1.57 2.59 81 118.4 133.1 4.05 8.16 9.18
31 24.7 39.4 1.55 1.70 2.71 82 120.3 135.0 4.1 8.29 9.31
32 26.6 41.3 1.6 1.83 2.84 83 122.2 136.9 4.15 8.42 9.44
33 28.4 43.1 1.65 1.96 2.97 84 124.1 138.8 4.2 8.55 9.57
34 30.3 45.0 1.7 2.09 3.10 85 125.9 140.6 4.25 8.68 9.70
35 32.2 46.9 1.75 2.22 3.23 86 127.8 142.5 4.3 8.81 9.82
36 34.1 48.8 1.8 2.35 3.36 87 129.7 144.4 4.35 8.94 9.95
37 35.9 50.6 1.85 2.48 3.49 88 131.6 146.3 4.4 9.07 10.08
38 37.8 52.5 1.9 2.61 3.62 89 133.4 148.1 4.45 9.20 10.21
39 39.7 54.4 1.95 2.74 3.75 90 135.3 150.0 4.5 9.33 10.34
40 41.6 56.3 2 2.86 3.88 91 137.2 151.9 4.55 9.46 10.47
41 43.4 58.1 2.05 2.99 4.01 92 139.1 153.8 4.6 9.59 10.60
42 45.3 60.0 2.1 3.12 4.14 93 140.9 155.6 4.65 9.72 10.73
43 47.2 61.9 2.15 3.25 4.27 94 142.8 157.5 4.7 9.85 10.86
44 49.1 63.8 2.2 3.38 4.40 95 144.7 159.4 4.75 9.97 10.99
45 50.9 65.6 2.25 3.51 4.52 96 146.6 161.3 4.8 10.10 11.12
46 52.8 67.5 2.3 3.64 4.65 97 148.4 163.1 4.85 10.23 11.25
47 54.7 69.4 2.35 3.77 4.78 98 150.3 165.0 4.9 10.36 11.38
48 56.6 71.3 2.4 3.90 4.91 99 152.2 166.9 4.95 10.49 11.51
49 58.4 73.1 2.45 4.03 5.04 100 154.1 168.8 5 10.62 11.63
50 60.3 75.0 2.5 4.16 5.17
218
Digital Scroll High Temperature NTC Sensor Chart

Degree Degree Resistance Degree Degree Resistance
C F (kOhms) C F (kOhms)
-40 -40 2889.60 75 167 12.73
-35 -31 2087.22 80 176 10.79
-30 -22 1522.20 85 185 9.20
-25 -13 1121.44 90 194 7.87
-20 -4 834.72 95 203 6.77
-15 5 627.28 100 212 5.85
-10 14 475.74 105 221 5.09
-5 23 363.99 110 230 4.45
0 3 280.82 115 239 3.87
5 41 218.41 120 248 3.35
10 50 171.17 125 257 2.92
15 59 135.14 130 266 2.58
20 68 107.44 135 275 2.28
25 77 86.00 140 284 2.02
30 86 69.28 145 293 1.80
35 95 56.16 150 302 1.59
40 104 45.81 155 311 1.39
45 113 37.58 160 320 1.25
50 122 30.99 165 329 1.12
55 131 25.68 170 338 1.01
60 140 21.40 175 347 0.92
65 149 17.91 180 356 0.83
70 158 15.07
219
Basic Psychrometric Notes

Here's a very simple look at dew point. Humidity refers to water vapor in the air;
that is water in the form of an invisible gas.
 The warmer the air, the more water vapor it can have in it.
 When the air can no longer "hold" all of the water vapor in it, the vapor
begins condensing into ordinary, liquid water. If the air is in the sky, the
vapor condenses into cloud drops. If the air is right above the ground the
vapor condenses to make fog (which is nothing but a cloud that's on the
ground.) If the air is touching things such as grass or a car's windshield, it
will condense to make dew.
 If air cools enough it will eventually reach a point at which the water vapor
begins condensing.
 Dew point is really a measure of how much water vapor is in the air, but it's
given as the temperature at which that particular bunch of air has to cool to
for the water vapor to begin condensing. For example, if a weather report
says that the temperature is 70 degrees and the dew point is 55 degrees,
you know that if the air cools to 55 degrees the water vapor in it will start
condensing into dew on the ground or fog right above the ground or clouds
in the sky.
A psychrometric chart is a graph of the physical properties of moist air at a

constant pressure or often equated to an elevation relative to sea-level. The chart
graphically expresses how various properties relate to each other, and is thus a
graphical 'equation of state'. The thermo physical properties found on most
psychometric charts are:
Dry-bulb temperature is that of an air sample, as determined by an

ordinary thermometer, the thermometer's bulb being dry.
Wet-bulb temperature is that of an air sample after it has passed through a
constant-pressure, ideal adiabatic saturation process, that is, after the air
has passed over a large surface of liquid water in an insulated channel. In
practice, this is the reading of a thermometer whose sensing bulb is
covered with a wet sock evaporating into a rapid stream of the sample air.
Dew point temperature is that at which a moist air sample at the same
pressure would reach water vapor saturation. At this saturation point, water
vapor would begin to condense into liquid water fog or (if below freezing)
solid hoarfrost, as heat is removed. The dew point temperature is measured
easily and provides useful information, but is normally not considered an
independent property. It duplicates information available via other humidity
properties and the saturation curve.
Relative Humidity is the ratio of the mole fraction of water vapor to the
mole fraction of saturated moist air at the same temperature and pressure.
The notion that air "holds" moisture, or that moisture dissolves in dry air and
saturates the solution at some proportion, is an erroneous (although
widespread) concept.
220
Humidity Ratio is the proportion of mass of moisture present in a unit mass

of air at the given conditions (DBT, WBT, DPT, RH, etc.).
Specific Enthalpy symbolized by h, also called heat content per unit mass,
is the sum of the internal energy of a thermodynamic system. These values
correspond to the saturated state and are to be read parallel to WBT
values.
Specific Volume also called Inverse Density. Volume per unit mass.
The versatility of the psychrometric chart lies in the fact that by knowing three
independent properties of some moist air, one of which is the chart's pressure, the
other properties can be determined. Changes in state, such as when two air
streams mix, can be modeled easily and somewhat graphically using the correct
psychrometric chart for the location's air pressure or elevation relative to sea level.
For locations at or below 2000 ft (600 m), a common assumption is to use the sea
level psychrometric chart.
To determine the Dew Point from the charts below, find the temperature of the air
in question on the left side of the table. Next, locate the relative humidity of the air
in question across the top of the table. The intersection of these two numbers in
the matrix identifies the temperature at which Dew Point is reached.
Example: Read the air temperature in the left hand column and the humidity at the
top of the chart. If the temperature of the storage unit is 75ºF (24º C) and the
relative humidity is 35%, the intersection of the two shows the dew point of the
area to be 45ºF (7ºC). If the metal coming in is below 45ºF (7ºC), water will
condense on the metal.
Air Temperature in Degrees Fahrenheit
Air
% Relative Humidity
Temp
°F 100 95 90 85 80 75 70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35
100 100 99 97 95 93 91 89 86 84 81 78 75 71 67
95 95 93 92 90 88 86 84 81 79 76 73 70 67 63
90 90 88 87 85 83 81 79 76 74 71 68 65 62 59
85 85 83 81 80 78 76 74 72 69 67 64 61 58 54
80 80 78 77 75 73 71 69 67 65 62 59 56 53 50
75 75 73 72 70 68 66 64 62 60 58 55 52 49 45
70 70 68 67 65 63 61 59 57 55 53 50 47 44 40
65 65 63 62 60 59 57 55 53 50 48 45 42 40 36
221
Unit Code
The iCOM control uses a system that automatically configures the control board
for an individual unit based on the components and options contained within the
unit.
The unit will have a Unit Configuration Code Tag displayed on the front of the
electric panel cover. This code is entered during the factory QA process and will
define the unit configuration and automatically set various parameters for
functionality. The following pages will define the unit code parameters. They will
also allow the service technician to re-enter or change the unit code manually if
necessary through the unit display panel in the Factory Settings Menu located in
the Advanced Menus.
Once the ID numbers of the Unit Code are entered or changed the user must
move to line A008 “Unit Code Control” and select “Save and Execute” to load the
changes in to the control. On line A009 “Unit Code Status” will show “Changed”
before “Save and Execute” is done. Once “Save and Execute” has completed,
A009 should show OK.
If the control board does not have a Unit Code entered in the board the unit will not
start and an alarm will appear “Unit Code Missing”. A code will need to be entered
and saved.
The on the following pages define the 18 Unit Codes. The Unit Code choices are
3-digit numbers shown in the left hand column with the definition of the number in
the right column.
THIS UNIT CODE MUST NOT BE CHANGED UNLESS

INSTRUCTED BY A FACTORY SERVICE TECHNICIAN
222
Unit Configuration Code Definitions

Unit Code 001 (Firmware Revision)
Code Firmware Revision

000 Automatically Set
Unit Code 002 (Unit Product Type)
Code Product Type

000 DS / VS
001 Deluxe
003 Challenger
Unit Code 003 (Refrigerant Type)
Code Refrigerant Type

000 None
001 R22
002 R407C
Unit Code 004 (Cooling Operation)
Code Cooling Operation

000 Chilled Water, Single Circuit, no feedback
001 Scroll / Rotary, qty 1
002 Scroll, qty 1 w/ Hot Gas Bypass
003 Scroll, qty 2
004 Scroll, qty 2 w/ Hot Gas Bypass
009 Digital Scroll, qty 1
010 Digital Scroll, qty 2
011 Digital Scroll, qty 1 w/ Thermistor
012 Digital Scroll, qty 2 w/ Thermistor
013 Semi-hermetic 2 Step, qty 2
014 Semi-hermetic 2 Step, qty 2, w/ Hot Gas Bypass
015 Semi-hermetic 4 Step, qty 2
223
Unit Configuration Code Definitions Continued

Unit Code 005 (Humidifier Type)
Code Humidifier Type

000 None
001 Canister, On / Off, 200 Volt
015 Infrared Large
016 Infrared Small
017 On / Off, Steam Grid / Canister
Unit Code 006 (Heating Type)
Code Heating Type

000 None
001 1 Stage Electric
002 2 Stage Electric
003 3 Stage Electric (3 Outputs)
005 SCR Electric
006 (0 – 10 V) Hot Water / Steam Valve
007 (0 – 10 V) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (1 Stage)
008 (0 – 10 V) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (2 Stage)
014 Hot Gas Reheat Valve
015 Hot Gas Reheat Valve w/ Electric (1 Stage)
016 Hot Gas Reheat Valve w/ Electric (2 Stage)
019 (On / Off) Hot Water/Steam Valve
020 (On / Off) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (1 Stage)
021 (On / Off) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (2 Stage)
023 (1.75V) Hot Water/Steam Valve
024 (1.75V) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (1 Stage)
025 (1.75V) Hot Water / Steam Valve w/ Electric (2 Stage)
224

Unit Code 007 (Heat Rejection Type)
Code Heat Rejection Type

000 Air (Lee-Temp)
001 Air (Fanspeed)
002 Air (Lee-Temp) w/ Freecooling Valve Standard Operation
003 Air Fanspeed) w/ Freecooling Valve Standard Operation
004 Air (Lee-Temp) w/ Freecooling Valve Reverse Operation
005 Air (Fanspeed) w/ Freecooling Valve Reverse Operation
006 Water / Glycol
007 Glycool w/ Valve Standard Operation
008 Glycool w/ Valve Reverse Operation
009 Dual Cool w/ Valve Standard Operation
010 Dual Cool w/ Valve Reverse Operation
011 Chilled Water w/ Valve Standard Operation
012 Chilled Water w/ Valve Reverse Operation
024 Water / Glycol w/ Motorized Ball Valve Control
025 Glycool w/ Valve Standard Operation w/ Motorized Ball Valve Control
026 Glycool w/ Valve Reverse Operation w/ Motorized Ball Valve Control
027 Dual Cool w/ Valve Standard Operation w/ Motorized Ball Valve Control
028 Dual Cool w/ Valve Reverse Operation w/ Motorized Ball Valve Control
Unit Code 008 (Cooling Valve Travel Time)
Code Valve Travel Time

000 No Valve / NA
002 Valve (0 – 10V) / NA
003 Valve (0.9 – 1.8V) / NA
004 Valve 24V Modulating (62 Seconds)
225

Unit Code 009 (Fan Control)
Code Fan Control Type

000 Standard
001 ECM
002 Inverter
Unit Code 010 (Languages)
Code Language Group

000 Not Used
Unit Code 011, 012, 013 and 014 (Customer Input Alarms)
Code Customer Input Alarms - RAD 1, 2, 3, 4

000 None (Use Default Setting)
001 Smoke Detected
002 Liquitect Alarm Only
005 Condensate Pump Alarm Only
008 Loss of Flow Alarm Only
009 Loss of Flow Shutdown Unit and Compressors, NO Pumpdown
010 Loss of Flow Lockout LLSV’s and T/D Shutdown Compressors
011 Stand-by Glycol Pump On
012 Humidifier Off by Customer Input
013 Reheat Off by Customer Input
014 Humidifier and Reheat Off by Customer Input
015 Compressor Off by Customer Input and NO Pumpdown
017 Standby Unit On
018 Freecooling Lockout
019 Compressor Off by Customer Input with Pumpdown
020 Heat Rejection VFD Alarm
021 Heat Rejection TVSS Alarm
226

Unit Code 015 (Dehumidification / Reheat Sequencing)
Code Dehumidification/Reheat Sequencing

000 No Dehumidification
001 Chilled Water Unit Dehumidification
002 2 Compressors (Two - Stage) Dehumidification: Lockout Reheat
003 2 Compressors (Two - Stage) Dehumidification: Normal Reheat
004 2 Compressors (Two - Stage) Dehumidification: Delayed Reheat
005 Compressor 1 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Lockout Reheat
006 Compressor 1 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Normal Reheat
007 Compressor 1 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Delayed Reheat
008 Compressor 2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Lockout Reheat
009 Compressor2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Normal Reheat
010 Compressor 2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Delayed Reheat
011 Compressor 1 or 2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Lockout Reheat
012 Compressor 1 or 2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Normal Reheat
013 Compressor 1 or 2 (Single - Stage) Dehumidification: Delayed Reheat
Unit Code 016 (Q15 output Signal)
Code Q15 Output Signal

000 No Output
Unit Code 017

Reheat/Humidifier
Code
Lockout and Load Monitor
000 Standard - No Override
001 If Reheat On, Lockout Humidifier
002 If Humidifier On, Lockout Reheat
Unit Code 018 (Not Used)
Code NOT USED

000 -
227
Notes
228
Chapter 5
MicroChannel Condenser
 MC Condenser Control Board Connections
 MC Condenser Opto-Isolator and Triac Legends
 Outdoor CANbus, DIP Switch and Jumper Settings
 Accessing the MC Condenser Screens and Code Descriptions
 Alarm and Troubleshooting Descriptions
 MC Condenser Software Updating Procedure
 Manual Fan Configuration for the MC Condenser
 Manual Motor Operational Test for the MC Condenser
229
MC Condenser Control Board Connections
P15: Analog Outputs 0 – 10VDC

P15-1: 0 – 10 VDC Output Circuit 1 P15-3: 0 – 10 VDC Output Circuit 2
P15-2: DC Gnd Circuit 1 P15-4: DC Gnd Circuit 2
P17: Pressure Transducer 1 Circuit

P17-1: +5 DCV Signal to PT1
P17-2: Analog Signal from PT1
P17-3: DCV Comm
P18: Pressure Transducer 2 Circuit

P18-1: +5 VDC Signal to PT2
P18-2: Analog Signal from PT2
P18-3: DCV Comm
P19: Thermister – Outdoor Ambient

P19-1: DCV Signal to ATS P19-3: ATS Input Signal to MP
P19-2: no connection P19-4: no connection
P20: Refrigerant Thermister Circuit 1

P20-1: DCV Signal to RTS1 P20-3: RTS1 Input Signal to MP
230
MC Condenser Control Board

P21: Refrigerant Thermister Circuit 2
P21-1: DCV Signal to RTS2 P21-3: RTS2 Input Signal to MP
P23: Fan Contactor - FC1

P23-1: 24 VAC from Q1 to FC1 Coil
P23-2: 24 VAC from FC1 Coil

P24-1: 24 VAC Gnd for T1
P24-2: 24 VAC from T1
P27: Fan Contactor – FC2



P54: USB Port Connection
P64: Ethernet Port

Connects the control board to a computer using a crossover cable
P67: CAN Bus Service Terminal Connection (Digital Signal)
P79: RS-485 Connection for EC Fan

P79-1: Data A (+DCV)
P79-2: Data B (–DCV)
P79-3: DCV Gnd
231

P80: RS-485 Service Connection
P80-3: DCV Gnd
P81: RS-485 Connection for EC Fan

P81-3: DCV Gnd
TB11: Basic 24 VAC Condenser Connections

TB11-1: 24 VAC from P24-1 to TS-12
TB11-2: 24 VAC from TS-13 to Input U1
TB11-3: no connection
TB38: Remote Shutdown Device

TB38-1: 24 VAC from P24-1
TB38-2: 24 VAC from TB38-1 to Input U8 / Q1 / Q2 / Q3 / Q4
TB49: CAN BUS Connection from Indoor Liebert Unit

TB49-1: CANH from indoor unit
TB49-2: DCV Gnd
TB49-3: CANL from indoor unit
TB50: CAN BUS Connection to Additional Condensing Unit or PRE

TB50-1: CANH to next condenser
TB50-2: DCV Gnd
TB50-3: CANL to next condenser
TB56: Not Used

TB56-1: 24 VAC from Q5
TB56-2: E1 – 24 VAC Gnd
232

TB57: Not Used
TB57-1: 24 VAC from Q6
TB57-2: E1 – 24 VAC Gnd
TB74: Field Connections for Remote Alarms

TB74-1: K3 Common TB74-4: K4 Common
TB74-2: K3 N.O. Contact TB74-5: K4 N.O. Contact
TB74-3: K3 N.C. Contact TB74-6: K4 N.C. Contact
P42: No Plug supplied on board

P45-1: Jumper to P45-2 P45-3: 24 VAC Gnd
P45-2: Jumper to P45-1 P45-4: 24 VAC
Terminal Sections 24 VAC

TS-12: 24 VAC from TB11-1 to Surge Protective Device (SPD) contact
TS-13: 24 VAC from SPD contact to TB11-2 to U1 Alarm Input
TS-70: 24 VAC from TS-12 (field wired to TS-70 located at indoor unit)
24 VAC from TS-71 (field wired from TS-71 located at indoor unit)
TS-71:
to TB11-7 for heat rejection status
24 VAC from TS-71 (located at condensing unit) to TB11-8 for
TS-230:
heat rejection status
TS-SH: Shielded cable ground
233
Control Board, 1 supplied per condenser: Typical

Location of Opto-Isolators and Traic’s
Output Opto-Isolators and Triac’s Input Opto-Isolators
Global Condenser Input Opto / Output Opto / Triac Legend:
Input Output Opto

Purpose Purpose
Opto / Triac
Surge Protective
U1 U1 / Q1 Fan Contactor 1 (FC1)
Device (SPD) Circuit #1
U2 not used U2 / Q2 Fan Contactor 2 (FC2)
U5 not used U5 / Q5 not used
Heat Rejection Interlock
U6 U6 / Q6 not used
Input Signal
Heat Rejection Interlock
U7
Input Signal
Power On (Remote
U8
Shutdown Device)
234
MC Condenser Outdoor CANbus Connections, DIP

Switch and Jumper Settings
235
Accessing the MC Condenser Menu Screens

In the initial screen, press the ESC key and the display enters into the first menu.
The five menu choices are:
 Analog Signals Menu
 Active alarm Menu
 History Alarms Menu, maximum of 100 alarms
 Configuration Menu
 Preparation Menu – ONLY to be changed if directed by the factory or the
technician has updated the condenser software
Use the Up and Down keys to scroll through the menu choices and the Enter key
to access the menu choice.
236
MC Condenser Analog Signal Menu

Item Imperial
Definition
ID (Metric)
F00 Condenser pressure 1 psi (bar)
F01 Condenser pressure 2 psi (bar)
F02 Ambient temperature °F (°C)
F03 Refrigerant temperature 1 °F (°C)
F04 Refrigerant temperature 2 °F (°C)
F10 EC Fan1 actual speed RPM (RPM)
F11 EC Fan1 requested speed % (%)
F20 EC Fan 2 actual speed RPM (RPM)
F21 EC Fan 2 requested speed % (%)
F50 Subcooling 1 °F (°C)
F51 Subcooling 2 °F (°C)
F90 Firmware version major xx
F91 Firmware version minor xx
F92 Firmware version build xx
237
MC Condenser Configuration Menu

Item Imperial
Definition Notes
ID (Metric)
C00 EBM EC Fan address EC Fan range from
1 to 4, valid fan model
C01 Ziehl Abegg EC Fan address
(menu line C03 – C06)
C02 Fans Tech EC Fan address must
set prior
be to addressing
C03 EC Fan 1 model ID 0 (0) 0 = None
C04 EC Fan 2 model ID 0 (0) 1 = EBM
C05 EC Fan 3 model ID 0 (0) 2 = Ziehl Abegg
C06 EC Fan 4 model ID 0 (0) 3 = Fans Tech
0 = Single circuit
C07 System model ID 0 (0)
2 = Dual circuit
1 = R22
C09 System refrigerant type 2 (2) 2 = R407C
3 = R410A
Condenser pressure absolute 261 psi
C10
maximum 1 (18.0 bar)
C11
maximum 2 (18.0 bar)
C12
minimum 1 (13.0 bar)
C13
minimum 2 (13.0 bar)
C14 Condenser pressure PID Kp 1.00 (1.00)
C15 Condenser pressure PID Kip 0.02 (0.02)
C16 Condenser pressure PID Kdp 0.00 (0.00)
Refrigerant temperature 95.0°F
C17
maximum 1 (35.0°C)
C18
maximum 2 (35.0°C)
C19
minimum 1 (25.0°C)
C20
minimum 2 (25.0°C)
Refrigerant temperature
C21 1.00 (1.00)
PID Kp
C22 0.02 (0.02)
PID Kip
C23 0.00 (0.00)
PID Kdp
0 – Manual
C24 System control state 1 (1)
1 - Automatic
Condenser pressure 188 psi
C25
set point 1 (13.0 bar)
Condenser pressure 188 psi
C26
set point 2 (13.0 bar)
238
MC Condenser Configuration Menu Continued

Item Imperial
Definition Notes
ID (Metric)
0 = No LT Installed
C27 System Lee Temp option 0 (0)
1 = LT Installed
EC Fan minimum speed for Lee 10%
C28
Temp (10%)
C32
set point 1 (32.0°C)
C33
set point 2 (32.0°C)
C34 EC Fan 1 Request Speed 0% (0%) These values can
be manually set
C35 EC Fan 2 Request Speed 0% (0%)
only when the
system control is in
C36 EC Fan 3 Request Speed 0% (0%)
manual
C37 EC Fan 4 Request Speed 0% (0%) (menu line C24)
Maximum condenser pressure 1 348 psi
C38
in low noise mode (24.0 bar)
Maximum condenser pressure 2 348 psi
C39
in low noise mode (24.0 bar)
Preferred display measurement 0 = Metric
C90 1 (0)
units 1 = Imperial
Clear alarm history. Clears all Press “ENT” to clear
C98 no value
inactive alarms alarm history
Restore all parameters to default
values. The EC Fan models will Press “ENT” to
C99 no value
be reset to 0. The EC Fan restore to default
addresses are not affected.
239
MC Condenser Alarm Menu

Alarm
Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting
ID
Check communications
CAN communication Communications wiring circuit wiring, ignore on
000
failure missing or damaged condenser without CAN
wiring
Ethernet communications Ethernet hardware or Ignore alarm, Ethernet
001
failure connection failure connection is not present
USB communications USB device or file is Replace USB device or
002
failure damaged file
003 Data corruption Memory chip is damaged Replace PCB board
Reboot. If reboot fails
004 System error Internal error
consult the factory
Remote shutdown signal Check the remote
005 Remote shutdown is available or TS38 is shutdown signal or
not connected connect TS38 wiring
Shutdown due to EC Fan
006 All fans have failed Consult the factory
alarm
007 SPD alarm SPD damaged Replace SPD
Condenser pressure Condenser pressure Replace condenser
008
sensor 1 failure sensor 1 damaged pressure sensor 1
Condenser pressure Condenser pressure Replace condenser
009
sensor 2 failure sensor 2 damaged pressure sensor 2
Condenser pressure 1
010
high alarm
Condenser pressure 2 High pressure: Fan High pressure: Fix fan
011
high alarm failure or clogged coils or clean coils
Condenser pressure 1 Low pressure: Loss of Low pressure: Check for
012
low alarm charge refrigerant leak
013
low alarm
EC Fan speed mode
maximum must be
014 overridden due to No action is needed
high
condenser pressure 1
high
EC Fan speed mode
maximum must be
high
condenser pressure 2
high
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature Replace ambient
016
sensor failure sensor damaged temperature sensor
Ambient temperature Ambient temperature
017 No action is needed
high alarm high
240
MC Condenser Alarm Menu Continued

Alarm
Definition Possible Cause Troubleshooting
ID
Ambient temperature low Ambient temperature
018 No action is needed
alarm low
Condenser temperature Condenser temperature Replace condenser
019
sensor 1 failure sensor 1 damaged temperature sensor 1
Condenser temperature Condenser temperature Replace condenser
020
sensor 2 failure sensor 2 damaged temperature sensor 2
Condenser temperature 1
021
high alarm
Condenser temperature 2 High temperature: Fan High temperature: Fix
022
high alarm failure or clogged coils fan or clean coils
Condenser temperature 1 Low temperature: Low temperature:
023
low alarm Consult the factory Consult the factory
Condenser temperature 2 refrigerant leak
024
low alarm
EC Fan speed mode
maximum must be
1 high
refrigerant temperature 1
high
EC Fan speed mode
maximum must be
2 high
refrigerant temperature 2
high
241
MC Condenser EC Fan Alarm Information

Alarm
Meaning Possible Cause Handling Method
ID
EC Fan high link 1. EC Fan is locked Cause 1. check for locked EC Fan
00
current 2. EC Fan is damaged Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
EC Fan drive
01 EC Fan is damaged Replace EC Fan
error
EC Fan earth to
ground fault
EC Fan 1. EC Fan is locked Cause 1. Check for locked EC Fan
electronics heat 2. EC Fan is damaged Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
03
sink thermal 3. Ambient temperature Cause 3. Check ambient
overload is high temperature
EC Fan hall
failure
EC Fan IGBT
failure
06 EC Fan line fault Power supply abnormal Check power supply
EC Fan motor
07 EC Fan motor is locked Check if EC fan is locked
locked
1. EC Fan is locked Cause 1. Check for locked EC Fan
EC Fan motor 2. EC Fan is damaged Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
08
thermal overload 3. Ambient temperature Cause 3. Check ambient
is too high temperature
EC Fan phase
09 Phase failure Check power supply
failure alarm
EC Fan-specific
10 uncategorized Re-boot condenser if fans are not
alarm detected Internal EC Fan issue running. If alarm continues and fan
EC Fan-specific is not running, replace the EC Fan
11 uncategorized
warning detected
EC Fan 1. EC Fan is locked Cause 1. Check for locked EC Fan
electronics high 2. EC Fan is damaged Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
12
temperature 3. Ambient temperature Cause 3. Check ambient
condition Is high temperature
1. EC Fan input power Cause 1. Measure power supply
EC Fan high link
13 supply high voltage and verify proper
voltage
2. EC Fan is damaged voltage
1. EC Fan input power Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
EC Fan low link supply low voltage
14
voltage 2. EC Fan detection
error
NOTE:
The numbers in parentheses (1 – 4) indicates the EC Fan number. For example and
alarm ID number of “00” displayed as “100” indicates EC Fan #1 has an EC Fan high link
current alarm condition, “200” indicates EC Fan #2 has the alarm condition.
242
MC Condenser EC Fan Alarm Information Continued

Alarm
ID
1. Communications
Cause 1. Check EC Fan
failure between EC
communication circuit
Fan and control board
Cause 2. Replace EC Fan
2. EC Fan – 485
EC Fan – 485 Cause 3. Replace control board
communications
15 communications Cause 4. Check fan fuses, check
failure
failure that fan contactor is
3. Control board has
energized, check that
Problems
the fan model is not set
4. EC Fan not receiving
to “0”
power
NOTE:
The numbers in parentheses (1 – 4) indicates the EC Fan number. For example and
alarm ID number displayed as “112” indicates EC Fan #1 has an EC Fan electronics high
temperature alarm condition (alarm id “12”), the number “212” indicates EC Fan #2 has
the alarm condition.
243
MC Condenser Troubleshooting Information

1. No power to condenser Cause 1. Check voltage at input terminal
2. Condenser low voltage block
Condenser will transformer circuit Cause 2. Locate problem in condenser
not start breaker or fuse tripped electrical panel and repair
3. No low voltage signal to / Cause 3. Locate open electrical circuit
from indoor unit and repair
Faulty head pressure
Low discharge
control valve or condenser Replace if defective
pressure
control board (PEC / BEC)
Cause 1. Clean coil
1. Dirty condenser coil Cause 2. Check for low voltage signal
High discharge 2. Condenser fans not from indoor unit, check fan
pressure operating motors and fuses
3. High refrigerant charge Cause 3. Check refrigerant charge and
adjust as necessary
1. No voltage or improper Cause 1. Check voltage at the
Surge protective phasing exists at the condenser input terminal block
device (SPD) condenser Cause 2. Locate connection problem and
green and red 2. Electrical connects to the repair
LEDs are both SPD are faulty Cause 3. Recheck SPD LEDs with the
Off 3. Condenser disconnect condenser disconnect in the On
switch is turned Off position
Surge protective A power surge exceeding Replace the SPD and inspect the rest of
device (SPD) the rating of the SPD has the condenser components and replace
red LED is occurred as necessary
illuminated Cause 1. Check plug P24 to verify it is
securely connected, check
for loose connections to
transformer
Cause 2. Verify fuse next to P24 is not
1. Connect to plug P24 is
tripped, replace as necessary
loose or disconnected
Cause 3. Using a voltmeter verify the
2. Fuse located next to plug
Control board output of the control
P24 is tripped
LEDs do not transformer is 24Vac ± 10%, if
3. 24V transformer has
light value exceeds ± 10% verify the
failed
correct primary leads are being
4. Control board
used, re-wire as necessary
(PEC / BEC) has failed
Cause 4. If there is no output voltage,
verify primary connections are
secure and receiving the proper
voltage, if they are replace the
transformer
Jumper not installed
Install the jumper between the 24V and
between the 24V and DIN1
Fan will not run DIN1 terminals on the Ziehl-Abegg fan
terminals on the Ziehl-
motor
Abegg fan motor
244
MC Condenser Software Updating Procedure

Read the following instructions before updating the software in the MC Condenser
control board. Before starting the update verify that all of the condenser fan
motors are the same are the same vendor and model. If the fan motors are
different vendor or models the technician must manually address the motors in the
Configuration Menu.
1. Remove plug P24, located toward the bottom right hand corner on the
condenser control board to remove the 24 VAC control voltage.
2. Insert the flash containing the software update into the USB port label P54.
3. Re-insert plug P24 to repower the control board.
4. A 15 second counter will begin to count down to 0, the technician must
press the “ENT” key before the counter reaches 0.
5. The 3 digit LED display will show:
LED LED State Instructions

888 Solid Wait, control is booting up
Flashing counting **Press ENT button before countdown
U01
down from 15 to 0 reaches 0**
U02 Solid Wait, erasing internal memory
U03 Solid Wait, writing internal memory
APP Solid Wait, writing is done, starting the application
F00 Flash to value Updating is complete, remove the flash drive
6. Once the software update is complete navigate to and select the “P--”
preparation menu.
245
MC Condenser Software Updating Procedure

7. The preparation menu “P---“ allows the technician to program a default
configuration into condenser control board. During the preparation mode
programming the indoor unit should be properly powered down until this
step is completed
Item
Meaning Default Notes
ID
Set this value to “1” to enable preparation mode for
Enter
programming changes. Set back to “0” when
P01 preparation 0
configuration is completed to exit preparation mode
mode
and allow the control to reboot.
Used to address the EC Fans, all fans must be the
Automatic same model type.
P02 VSD 1 1 – EBM
configuration 2 – Ziehl Abegg
3 – Fans Tech
1 – R22
Refrigerant
P03 2 2 – R407C
type
3 – R410A
Number of 1 – Single circuit condenser
P04 1
circuits 2 – Dual circuit condenser
Lee-Temp 0 – No Lee-Temp installed
P05 0
option 1 – Lee-Temp installed
0 – Small
Condenser
P06 1 1 – Medium
size
2 - Large
8. After all programming is completed, properly cycle the condenser main

power off – on to save the new configuration.
9. Properly restore power to the indoor unit and verify the system is operating.
246
Manual Fan Motor Configuration for the MC Condenser

Read the following instructions before performing the manual fan motor
configuration procedure.
1. At the condenser control board navigate to the Configuration “C” menu and
press the enter button to access.
2. Use the Up or Down button to scroll to line C03 (EC Fan #1 Model ID) and
enter the fan model type installed in the condenser. Repeat the process for
menu lines C04 (EC Fan #2), C05 (EC Fan #3) and C06 (EC Fan #4).
enter “1” for EBM
enter “2” for Ziehl Abegg
enter “3” for Fans Tech
3. Carefully remove plugs P27, P28 and P29 (if you have a 4 fan condenser)
from the condenser control board.
4. To address Fan #1:
 On the condenser control board navigate to the configuration menu
and use the Up or Down button to select the correct EC Fan motor
type
 Scroll to line C00 for EBM motor
 Scroll to line C01 for Ziehl-Abegg motor
 Scroll to line C03 for Fans Tech motor
 When the correct EC Fan motor is selected Press the Enter button
 Use the Up or Down button to scroll to the number 1
 Press the Enter button and count to 10 seconds
 Press the Escape button
 Press the Enter button a second time and count to 10 seconds again
 Press the Escape button a second time

 Carefully remove plug P23 from the condenser control board
 Carefully re-install plug P27 on the condenser control board
 Wait for the fan motor to power up
type
247
Manual Fan Motor Configuration for the MC Condenser

type

type
8. Properly turn the Main Power to the condenser OFF.

9. Carefully plug all unplugged wire harnesses back into the condenser control
board.
10. Carefully turn the Main Power to the condenser ON.
248
Manual Fan Motor Operational Test for the MC Condenser

Read the following instructions before performing the manual fan motor
operational test procedure.
1. At the condenser control board navigate to the Configuration “C” menu, press
the enter button to access.
2. Use the Up or Down button and scroll to the line C24 (system control state),
press the Enter button and then press the Up or Down button to change from 1
(automatic operation) to 0 (manual operation), press the Enter button again.
3. Press the Escape button and use the Up or Down button to scroll to menu line
C34 (VSD1 request speed) to select EC Fan #1 and press the Enter button.
4. Press the Up or Down button to change the displayed from 0 to 100% fan
speed, press the Enter button and fan #1 should ramp up to full speed.
Note: If wrong fan ramps to 100% speed or the fan does not operate the fans are
probably incorrectly addressed. Refer to the Manual Fan Motor Configuration
section of this manual and re-address the fans.
5. If fan #1 ramps to full speed, press the Escape button and then the Enter
button. Press the Up or Down button to change the displayed value back to 0,
press the Enter button again.
C35 (VSD2 request speed) to select EC Fan #2, press the Enter button.
C36 (VSD3 request speed) to select EC Fan #3, press the Enter button.
C37 (VSD4 request speed) to select EC Fan #4 and press the Enter button.
15. Press the Escape button.
16. Use the Up or Down button and scroll to the line C24 (system control state),
press the Enter button and then press the Up or Down button to change from
0 (manual operation) to 1 (automatic operation), press the Enter button again.
The MC Condenser fan operation should be back to automatic operation based on
the system control requirements.
249
Notes
250
Chapter 6
Miscellaneous Information
 Model Number Nomenclature
 Refrigerant Charge and Pipes Sizing Tables
 Additional Oil Requirement Table
 Copper Pipe Fittings Equivalent Lengths FT (m)
 Glycol Solutions Concentration Mixtures Table
 Fluid Volume in Standard Type L Copper Piping
 MC Condenser Charging Instructions
 Temperature – Pressure table
251
Model Number Nomenclature

DS / VS Unit Model Numbers
iCOM Microprocessor Controlled Units 2005 – Present
DS: Downflow Standard

DS
VS: Upflow Standard
Nominal Capacity kW
028
(028, 035, 042, 053, 070, 077, 105)
A: Air Cooled
D: Dual Cooling, Air Cooled
A W: Water / Glycol
K: Glycool
H: Dual Cooling, Water / Glycol
U: Semi-hermetic with 4-step with R-407C
S: Scroll with R-407C
D: Digital Scroll with R-407C
U
M: Semi-hermetic with 4 step with R-22C
R: Scroll with R-22C
G: Digital Scroll with R-22C
A: 460V-3ph-60Hz
B: 575V-3ph-60Hz
C: 208V-3ph-60Hz
A D: 230V-3ph-60Hz
2: 380V-3ph-60Hz
J: 200V-3ph-50Hz
M: 380-415V-3ph-50Hz
0: Centrifugal Fans
0
1: Electronically Commutated (EC) Fans
0: No Reheat
E: 3-Stage Electric Reheat
E
S: SCR
W: Hot Water
0: No Humidifier
I I: Infrared Humidifier
S: Steam Canister Humidifier
XXXX Factory Configuration Code
Capacity kW Capacity kW
(tons) (tons)
028 kW (8 tons) 070 kW (20 tons)
035 kW (10 tons) 077 kW (22 tons)
042 kW (12 tons) 105 kW (30 tons)
053 kW (15 tons)
252
CW (Chilled Water) Unit Model Numbers

CW Liebert CW floor mounted unit

Nominal Capacity kW
114
(026, 038, 041, 051, 060, 076, 084, 106, 114, 181, 300, 400)
D: Downflow
D
U: Upflow with Front return
C C: Chilled Water
S: Forward curved centrifugal fan with std. motor
S V: Forward curved centrifugal fan with variable speed drive
1: EC motorized impeller (electronically commutated)
A: 460V-3ph-60Hz
B: 575V-3ph-60Hz
C: 208V-3ph-60Hz
D: 230V-3ph-60Hz
A
2: 380V-3ph-60Hz
F: 380V-3ph-50Hz
G: 415V-3ph-50Hz
M: 380-415V-3ph-50Hz
2: 2 way valve std. pressure
3: 3 way valve std. pressure
2
1: 2 way valve high pressure
T: 3 way valve high pressure
1234 Factory Configuration Code
A-Z: Standard Configuration Code
A
S: Special Features Authorization Code
Capacity kW kW Capacity
(tons) (tons)
026 kW (8 tons) 084 kW (25 tons)
038 kW (11 tons) 106 kW (31 tons)
041 kW (12 tons) 114 kW (33 tons)
051 kW (15 tons) 181 kW (53 tons)
060 kW (18 tons) 300 kW (88 tons)
076 kW (22 tons) 400 kW (117 tons)
253
Challenger 3000 Unit Model Numbers

BF: Downflow
BU: Upflow
BF
BE: Downflow with Econ-O-Coil
BK: Upflow with Econ-O-Coil
042 Nominal Capacity 1000 Btuhs
A: Air Cooled
W: Water / Glycol Cooled
A G: Glycool
C: Chilled Water
E: Evaporator
S: Standard Scroll Compressor, R407C
D: Digital Scroll Compressor, R407C
S -: Evaporator with R22
7: Evaporator with R407C
-: Chilled Water, placeholder
A: 460V-3ph-60Hz
B: 575V-3ph-60Hz
C: 208V-3ph-60Hz
D: 230V-3ph-60Hz
A
2: 380V-3ph-60Hz
J: 200V-3ph-50Hz
H: 230V-3ph-50Hz
M: 380/415V-3ph-50Hz
M: Small iCOM Display
M
D: Large iCOM Display
0: No Reheat
E: Electric Reheat
E H: Hot Water Reheat
G: Hot Gas Reheat
S: SCR Reheat
0: No Humidifier
I I: Infrared Humidifier
S: Steam Canister Humidifier
Capacity Tons 3 5
Air Cooled 042A / 036E 067A / 060E
Water / Glycol Cooled 046W / 039E 071W / 060E
Chilled Water 068 102
254
Outdoor Condenser Model Number Nomenclature

-: No Disconnect Switch
D D: Disconnect Switch
T: TVSS and Disconnect Switch, standard on VFD Condensers
C Condenser
S: Single Refrigerant Circuit
D
D: Dual Refrigerant Circuits
F: Fan Speed Control
L: Main Control / Lee-Temp
F C: No Control / Chiller Lee-Temp
T: Ambient Fan Cycle / Lee-Temp
V: Variable Frequency Drive (VFD), dual circuit condensers only
- place holder
P: 208/230V-1ph-60Hz
Z: 460V-1ph-60Hz
V: 575V-1ph-60Hz
W: 200/230-1ph-50Hz
A
Y: 208/230V-3ph-60Hz
A: 460V-3ph-60Hz
B: 575V-3ph-60Hz
M: 380/415-3ph-50Hz
Outdoor Drycooler Model Number Nomenclature

-: No Disconnect Switch
D
D: Disconnect Switch
D Drycooler
N: No Pump Control
N S: Single Pump Control
D: Dual Pump Control
C: No Fan Control
L: Main Fan Control
T T: Ambient Fan Cycling
O: Fan Cycling and Pump Control
S: Special Order Fan and Pump Control
P: 208/230V-1ph-60Hz
W: 200/230-1ph-50Hz
Y: 208/230V-3ph-60Hz
A
A: 460V-3ph-60Hz
B: 575V-3ph-60Hz
M: 380/415-3ph-50Hz
48 Optional Circuiting (blank for standard circuiting)
255
Refrigerant Charge Calculation Tables
DS / VS: Indoor Unit Approximate R22 and R407C

Refrigerant Charge Amounts
R22 Charge per R407C Charge per
System Type 60 Hz Models
Circuit LB (kg) Circuit LB (kg)
028, 035, 042 6.5 (3.0) 5.5 (2.5)
Air Cooled 053,070,077 9.5 (4.3) 8.0 (3.6)
105 11.0 (5.0) 9.5 (4.3)
028, 035, 042 13.0 (5.9) 12.2 (5.6)
Water, Glycol / GLYCOOL 053,070,077 18.5 (8.40 17.0 (7.8)
105 24.0 (10.9) 22.5 (10.3)
DS / VS Systems Pipe Size Table Inches O.D. Cu

Standard Scroll Compressors (Non-Digital Scroll)
50 ft (15m) 100 ft (30m) 150ft (45m)

60 Hz Hot Gas Liquid Hot Gas Liquid Hot Gas Liquid
Models Line Line Line Line Line Line
028 kW 7/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8
035 kW 7/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8
042 kW 7/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8
053 kW 7/8 5/8 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
070 kW 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
077 kW 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
105 kW 1 – 3/8 7/8 1 – 3/8 7/8 1 – 3/8 1 - 1/8
256
4-Step Semi-Hermetic and Digital Scroll Compressors

50 ft (15m) 100 ft (30m) 150ft (45m)
028 kW 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/8 7/8 5/8
035 kW 7/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8
042 kW 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8 1 - 1/8 * 5/8
053 kW 7/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 * 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
070 kW 1 – 1/8 * 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
077 kW 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8 1 – 1/8 7/8
105 kW 1 – 3/8 7/8 1 – 3/8 7/8 1 – 3/8 1 - 1/8
* Requires the Vertical Riser only to be downsized one (1) trade size 1-1/8” = 7/8”
DS / VS Outdoor Condenser Approximate R22 and R407C

Refrigerant Charge per Circuit
R22 Standard Condenser Models Approximate Charge Amount
Single Circuit Dual Circuit LB/circuit

LB (kg) (kg/circuit)
60 Hz Lee-Temp Lee-Temp
FSC or FSC or
Condenser (Includes (Includes
VFD VFD
Models Receiver) Receiver)
083 5 (2.3) 27 (12.3) 3 (1.4) xxx
104 8 (3.6) 39 (17.7) 7 (3.2) 21 (9.5)
165 15 (6.8) 53 (24.0) 5 (2.3) 27 (12.3)
205 20 (9.1) 76 (34.5) 7 (3.2) 56 (25.3)
251 19 (8.6) 75 934.0) 10 (4.60 38 (17.2)
308 29 (13.2) 113 (51.3) 11 (5.0) 58 (26.3)
415 54 (24.5) 210 (95.0) 25 (11.3) 107 (48.4)
510 72 (32.7) xxx 30 (13.6) 149 (67.6)
616 xxx xxx 27 (12.3) 113 (51.3)
830 xxx xxx 53 (24.0) 210 (95.1)
1010 xxx xxx 60 (27.2) 154 (69.9)
257
R407C Standard Condenser Models Approximate Charge Amount
Single Circuit Dual Circuit LB/circuit

LB (kg) (kg/circuit)
60 Hz Lee-Temp Lee-Temp
FSC or FSC or
Condenser (Includes (Includes
VFD VFD
Models Receiver) Receiver)
083 5 (2.3) 26 (11.8) 3 (1.4) xxx
104 8 (3.6) 37 (16.8) 7 (3.2) 20 (9.0)
165 15 (6.8) 50 (22.7) 5 (2.3) 26 (11.8)
205 19 (8.6) 72 (32.7) 7 (3.2) 54 (24.4)
251 18 (8.2) 71 (32.2) 10 (4.60 36 (16.3)
308 28 (12.7) 107 (48.5) 11 (5.0) 55 (24.9)
415 51 (23.1) 200 (90.8) 24 (10.9) 102 (46.2)
510 68 (30.8) xxx 29 (13.2) 142 (64.4)
616 xxx xxx 26 (11.8) 108 (49.0)
830 xxx xxx 51 (23.1) 200 (90.8)
1010 xxx xxx 57 (25.9) 147 (66.7)
DS / VS: Scroll and Digital Scroll Compressor Additional

Oil Requirements
Additional Oil Required per Compressor Circuit
DS / VS System Charge Per Circuit – LB (kg) *

60 Hz 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Models (18.1) (27.2) (36.3) (45.4) (54.5) (63.5) (72.6) (81.6) (90.7)
Additional Oil Required Per Circuit – Ounces (Grams)
028
4 7 10 13 16 20 23 26
035 0
(113) (198) (283) (369) (454) (567) (652) (737)
042
7.5 15.5 23.5 31.5 39.5 47.5 55.5 63.5 71.5
053
(213) (439) (666) (893) (1120) (1347) (1573) (1800) (2027)
070
5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 69
077
(142) (369) (595) (822) (1049) (1276) (1502) (1729) (1956)
105
* For system charges over 200 lb (90.7kg) consult Liebert Technical Support
258
Challenger3000 Unit Approximate R407C Refrigerant

Charge
60 Hz R407C Charge
Models LB (kg)
042A 0.9 (0.4)
067A 1.4 (0.6)
Challenger3000 Pipe Size Table Inches O.D. Cu

50 ft (15m) 100 ft (30m) 150ft (45m)
042A 5/8 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 5/8
067A 7/8 1/2 7/8 5/8 7/8 5/8
Interconnection Piping R22 and R407C Refrigerant

Charge per 100 FT (30m)
R22 and R407C Charge Table
Size O.D. R22: LB/100 FT (kg/30m) R407C: LB/100 FT (kg/30m)

Cu In Liquid Line Hot Gas Line Liquid Line Hot Gas Line
3/8” 3.8 (1.7) xxx 3.7 (1.7) xxx
1/2” 7.3 (3.3) xxx 6.9 (3.1) 1.3 (0.6)
5/8” 11.7 (5.3) 2.1 (1.0) 11.0 (5.0) 2.2 (1.0)
3/4” 16.6 (7.5) 3.0 (1.4) 15.7 (7.1) 3.1 (1.4)
7/8” 24.4 (11.1) 4.4 (2.0) 23.0 (10.4) 4.5 (1.9)
1–1/8” 41.6 (18.9) 7.8 (3.5) 39.3 (17.8) 7.8 (3.5)
1- 3/8” 63.3 (28.7) 11.8 (5.4) 59.8 (27.1) 11.8 (5.4)
1–5/8” 87 (38.9) 16.7 (7.6) xxx 16.7 (7.6)
Note: If your calculated equivalent pipe length exceeds 150 ft

(45m) equivalent length contact your Liebert Sales Office
259
Copper Pipe Fittings Equivalent Lengths FT (m)

90° 90° 45°
O.D. Gate Globe Angle
Elbow Elbow Elbow Tee
Inch Valve Valve Valve
Copper Cast Copper
0.8 1.3 0.4 2.5 0.26 7.0 4.0
1/2”
(0.24) (0.39) (0.12) (0.76) (0.07) (2.13) (1.21)
0.9 1.4 0.5 2.5 0.28 9.5 5.0
5/8”
(0.27) (0.42) (0.15) (0.76) (0.08) (2.98) (1.52)
1.0 1.5 0.6 2.5 0.3 12.0 6.5
3/4”
(0.3) (0.45) (0.18) (0.76) (0.09) (3.65) (1.98)
1.45 1.8 0.8 3.6 0.36 17.2 9.5
7/8”
(0.44) (0.54) (0.24) (1.09) (0.1) (5.24) (2.89)
1.85 2.2 1.0 4.6 0.48 22.5 12.0
1-1/8”
(0.56) (067) (0.3) (1.4) (0.14) (6.58) (3.65)
2.4 2.9 1.3 6.4 0.65 32.0 16.0
1-3/8”
(0.73) (0.88) (0.39) (1.95) (0.19) (9.75) (4.87)
2.9 3.5 1.6 7.2 0.72 36.0 19.5
1-5/8”
(0.88) (1.06) (0.48) (0.21) (0.21) (10.97) (5.94)
Refrigerant traps are equal to 4 times the equivalent length of same size pipe per
this table.
Glycol Solution Concentration Mixtures Table

Ethylene Glycol
Percent Ethylene
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
Glycol by Volume
32°F 25°F 16°F 5°F -10°F -32°F
Freezing Point °F (°C)
(0°C) (-3.9°C) (-8.9°C) (-15.0°C) (-23.3°C) (-35.5°C)
Apparent Specific
1.000 1.014 1.028 1.042 1.057 1.071
Gravity at 50°F (10°C)
Propylene Glycol
Percent Propylene
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50%
Glycol by Volume
32°F 25°F 20°F 10°F -5°F -30°F
Freezing Point °F (°C)
(0°C) (-3.9°C) (-6.7°C) (-12.2°C) (-20.6°C) (-34.4°C)
Apparent Specific
1.000 1.014 1.028 1.042 1.057 1.071
Gravity at 50°F (10°C)
260
Fluid Volume in Standard Type L Copper Piping

Diameter Volume
O.D. Inches Gal/ft (l/m)
1/2” (0.430) 0.008 (0.01)
5/8” (0.545) 0.012 (0.15)
3/4” (0.666) 0.018 (0.22)
7/8” (0.785) 0.025 (0.31)
1-1/8” (1.025) 0.043 (0.53)
1-3/8” (1.265) 0.065 (0.81)
1-5/8” (1.505) 0.092 (1.15)
2-1/8” (1.985) 0.161 (2.00)
2-5/8” (2.465) 0.248 (3.08)
3-1/8” (2.945) 0.354 (4.40)
3-5/8” (3.425) 0.479 (5.95)
4-1/8” (3.905) 0.622 (7.73)
261
Notes
262
Liebert MicroChannel Air Cooled Condenser

Refrigerant Charging Instructions
Liebert MicroChannel condensers are charge sensitive and require an accurate
calculation of the system charge to avoid overcharging. To avoid overcharging,
additional guidelines are recommended to ensure trouble free operation.
 When charging the system in an outdoor ambient temperature below 50ºF

(10ºC), re-check the subcooling temperature against Table 4 when the
outdoor ambient is above 60ºF (15.6ºC).
 The indoor space temperature should be maintained between 70 - 80ºF
(21 – 26.7ºC) return air temperature at the indoor unit before the final
charge adjustments are made.
 Charging the unit with an indoor space return temperature greater than
80ºF (26.7ºC) may result in the unit being overcharged.
 Charge by the subcooling temperature measured at the indoor unit. See
Table 4 for the target subcooling temperatures.
 Pressure and temperature measuring instruments should be capable of
measuring to ± 10 psig (103.4kPa) and ± 2ºF (1.1ºC) for best subcooling
measurement.
1. Check the indoor unit nameplate for the refrigerant type to be used. The unit
control configuration differs depending on refrigerant type.
2. Refrigerant charging requires unit operation. Refer to the correct indoor unit
user manual for the Checklist for Completed Installation.
3. Calculate the amount of charge for the complete system. Refer to the correct
indoor unit user manual and Tables 1 and 2 in the following pages for the
proper condenser and refrigerant line charge data.
4. Accurately weigh in as much of the system charge are possible before starting
the unit. Do not exceed the calculated charge by more than 0.5 lb (0.37kg).
Risk of improper refrigerant charging can cause equipment damage
Refrigerant R407C is a blended refrigerant and must be introduced and charged

from the cylinder only as a liquid.
When adding liquid refrigerant to an operating system, it may be necessary to add

the refrigerant through the compressor suction service valve. Care must be
exercised to avoid damage to the compressor. Emerson recommends connecting
a sight glass between the charging hose and the compressor suction service
valve. This will permit adjustment of the cylinder hand valve so that liquid can
leave the cylinder while allowing vapor to enter the compressor.
263
Risk of improper refrigerant overcharge can cause equipment damage
Do not charge the Liebert MicroChannel condenser system using the clear
indoor unit sight glass as an indicator.
5. Turn on the Liebert MC disconnect switch.

6. Turn on the indoor unit disconnect switch. Operate the unit for 30 minutes
using the charging function of the indoor unit control for each circuit. The
charging function is located in the Diagnostics / Service Mode under the Main
Service Menu in the Liebert iCOM control (Reference the Liebert iCOM User
Manual SL-18835). The charging function operates the compressor(s) at full
capacity and energizes the liquid line solenoid valve(s). The optional reheat
and humidifier devices are disabled during charging. Manual operation of the
indoor unit fan(s) from the diagnostics menu of the iCOM control is also
required. A minimum of 20 psig (138 kPa) must be established and maintained
for the compressor to operate. The charging function can be reset as many
times as required to complete the unit charging.
7. Attach the pressure and temperature reading devices to the liquid line of the
indoor unit. Measure the initial subcooling and continue to add charge until the
recommended subcooling temperature for the current outdoor ambient
temperature is reached, see Table 4. The outdoor ambient temperature can be
read from the Liebert MC condenser control menu line F02.
8. Verify the subcooling temperature calculated from the measured values at the
evaporator against the subcooling reading of the Liebert MC control (menu line
F50 and F51). If the subcooling calculated from the gauge readings differs
from the Liebert MC subcooling by more than 3ºF (1.7ºC), then adjust the
charge amount to achieve the target subcooling temperature from Table 4
based on the Liebert MC control subcooling.
Failure to check the measured subcooling with the refrigerant gauges vs. the
Liebrt MC subcooling may result in an overcharged system. See Table 5 for
the additional proper correction based on the elevation of the condenser above the
indoor unit evaporator.
264
Table 1: Liebert MC Condenser R407C and R22 Refrigerant Charge

Single Circuit Dual Circuit
Condenser lb (kg) lb/circuit (kg/circuit)
Models Condenser Condenser Condenser Condenser
NO with NO with
Lee-Temp Lee-Temp Lee-Temp Lee-Temp
Approximate R407C (R22) Refrigerant Needed
MCS028 2.2 (1.0) 21.0 (9.5) n/a n/a
MCM040 3.0 (1.4) 21.8 (9.9) n/a n/a
MCM080 7.5 (3.4) 44.5 (20.2) 3.0 (1.4) 21.8 (9.9)
MCM120 n/a n/a n/a n/a
MCM160 n/a n/a 7.5 (3.4) 44.5 (20.2)
MCL055 5.0 (2.3) 25.9 (11.7) n/a n/a
MCL110 10.5 (4.8) 52.1 (23.7) 5.1 (2.3) 26.0 (11.8)
MCL165 18.3 (8.3) 84.8 (38.5) n/a n/a
MCL220 27.0 (12.3) 108.9 (49.4) 12.2 (5.6) 53.8 (24.4)
MCS: MicroChannel Condenser Small (fan) platform

MCM: MicroChannel Condenser Medium (fan) platform
MCL: MicroChannel Condenser Large (fan) platform
Table 2: R407C and R22 Interconnecting Piping Refrigerant Charge

Amount, based on Type ACR / Type L copper pipe
R407C and R22
Line lb / 100 ft (kg / 30m)
O.D. Hot Gas Liquid
inch Line Line
3/8 -- 3.7 (1.7)
1/2 -- 6.9 (3.1)
5/8 2.2 (1.0) 11.0 (5.0)
3/4 3.1 (1.3) 15.7 (7.1)
7/8 4.5 (1.9) 23.0 (10.4)
1 – 1/8 7.8 (3.5) 39.3 (17.8)
1 – 3/8 11.8 (5.4) 59.8 (27.1)
1 – 5/8 16.7 (7.6) --
265
Table 3: Fan Speed Suction Pressure Transducer Settings

R407C R22
Function Gauge psiG Absolute Gauge Absolute
(kPa) psiA (kPa) psiG (kPa) psiA (kPa)
Minimum to Start cooling 35 (241) 50 (344) 35 (241) 50 (344)
Low Pressure Cutout 20 (138) 35 (241) 20 (138) 35 (241)
Freeze Protection (Std. DX) 35 (241) 54 (372) 35 (241) 54 (372)
Freeze Protection (DX w/
52 (358) 67 (461) 48 (331) 63 (434)
Econ-o-coil)
Note: Gauge pressures are at sea level
Table 4: Target Subcooling for Ambient Outdoor Temperature

Ambient Temp Subcooling Ambient Temp Subcooling
0ºF (-17.8ºC) 22ºF (12.0ºC) 80ºF (26.7ºC) 13ºF (7.2ºC)
40ºF (4.4ºC) 22ºF (12.0ºC) 105ºF (40.6ºC) 3ºF (1.8ºC)
70ºF (21.1ºC) 17ºF (9.3ºC)
Table 5: Difference in Subcooling Measurements: Indoor minus Outdoor

Liebert MC Condenser Evaporator Subcooling above Liebert MC: ºF (ºC)
above Evaporator ft (m) 80 ft (24m) 60 ft (18m) 40 ft (12m) 20 ft (6m)
Refrigerant R407C 10ºF (5.5ºC) 7ºF (3.8ºC) 4ºF (2.2ºC) 1ºF (0.6ºC)
R410A 6ºF (3.3ºC) 4ºF (2.2ºC) 2ºF (1.1ºC) 0ºF (0.0ºC)
Note: Assumes liquid line sized for no more than a 2ºF (1.1ºC) pressure drop
266
Table 6: Liquid Pressure and Temperature Chart - Saturated Liquid

Pressure R407C R22
PSIG BAR ºF ºC ºF ºC
170 11.7 81.5 27.5 90.6 32.6
180 12.4 85.1 29.5 94.3 34.6
190 13.1 88.6 31.5 97.9 36.6
200 13.8 92.0 33.3 101.4 38.6
210 14.5 95.2 35.1 104.7 40.4
220 15.2 98.3 36.8 108.0 42.2
230 15.9 101.4 38.5 111.1 44.0
240 16.6 104.3 40.2 114.2 45.7
250 17.2 107.2 41.8 117.1 47.3
260 17.9 109.9 43.3 120.0 48.9
270 18.6 112.6 44.8 122.8 50.4
280 19.3 115.3 46.3 125.5 52.0
290 20.0 117.8 47.7 128.2 53.4
300 20.7 120.3 49.1 130.8 54.9
310 21.4 122.8 50.4 133.3 56.3
320 22.1 125.2 51.8 135.8 57.7
330 22.8 127.5 53.1 138.2 59.0
340 23.4 129.8 54.3 140.6 60.3
350 24.1 132.1 55.6 142.9 61.6
360 24.8 134.3 56.8 145.2 62.9
370 25.5 136.4 58.0 147.4 64.1
380 26.2 138.6 59.2 149.6 65.4
390 26.9 140.6 60.3 151.8 66.5
400 27.6 142.7 61.5 153.9 67.7
500 34.5 161.3 71.8 173.1 78.4
600 41.1 177.4 80.8 189.5 87.5
267
Sample Subcooling Calculation

Liebert’s MC Condenser is 40 ft above the evaporator in an R407C system. The
outdoor ambient from the Liebert MC Condenser control menu line F02 is 98ºF
(36.7 ºC). The liquid refrigerant pressure is 300 psig (20.7 bar) and is 113ºF
(45.0ºC). The subcooling from the Liebert MC control is 5ºF (2.78ºC). Determine
the subcooling and verify the calculated subcooling against the reading of the
Liebert MC Condenser menu lines F50 for circuit #1 and F51 for circuit #2.
Evaporator Subcooling Calculation

Refrigerant type R407C
1. Ambient temperature 98ºF (36.7 ºC)
2. Condenser elevation 40 ft (12m)
3. Condenser elevation temperature correction 4ºF (2.2ºC)
4. Liquid line pressure 300 psig (20.7 bar)
5. Liquid pressure converted to temperature 120.3ºF (49.1 ºC)
6. Measured liquid line temperature 113.2ºF (45.1 ºC)
7. MC condenser subcooling reading 5ºF (2.78 ºC)
(menu line F50 – circuit #1 or F51 – circuit #2)
Subtract Line 6 (measured liquid line temperature) from Line 5 (liquid pressure converted
to temperature) to obtain the Calculated Subcooling temperature.
Line 5 (liquid pressure converted to temperature) 120.3ºF (49.1ºC)

Line 6 (measured liquid line temperature) - 113.2ºF (45.1ºC)
8. Calculated subcooling temperature 7.1ºF or 7ºF (3.89 ºC)
Elevation Correction
Subtract Line 3 (correction for condenser elevation above the evaporator from Line 8
(calculated subcooling) to obtain the Corrected Subcooling temperature.
Line 8 (calculated subcooling temperature) 7ºF (3.89ºC)

Line 3 (condenser elevation correction temperature) - 4ºF (2.22ºC)
9. Corrected subcooling temperature 3ºF (1.67ºC)
Verification Against MC Condenser
Subtract Line 7 (MC condenser subcooling reading from Line 9 (corrected subcooling) to
obtain the Corrected Subcooling temperature.
Line 9 (corrected subcooling temperature) 3ºF (1.67ºC)

Line 7 (MC condenser subcooling reading) -5ºF (2.78ºC)
10. Difference in temperature -2ºF (1.12ºC)
 If line 10 (difference value) is less than ±3ºF (±1.67ºC), NO charge adjustment is needed
 If line 10 (difference value) is less than -3ºF (-1.67ºC), ADD additional charge
 If line 10 (difference value) is greater than +3ºF (1.67ºC), the system is overcharged and
charge must be removed
268
Liebert MC Condenser Charging Worksheet

Evaporator Subcooling Calculation Circuit #1 Circuit #2
Refrigerant type
1. Ambient temperature
2. Condenser elevation
3. Condenser elevation temperature correction
4. Liquid line pressure
5. Liquid pressure converted to temperature
6. Measured liquid line temperature
7. MC condenser subcooling reading
Subtract Line 6 (measured liquid line temperature) from Line 5 (liquid pressure converted
to temperature) to obtain the Calculated Subcooling temperature.
Circuit #1 Circuit #2
Line 5
Line 6
8. Calculated subcooling temperature
Elevation Correction
Subtract Line 3 (correction for condenser elevation above the evaporator from Line 8
(calculated subcooling) to obtain the Corrected Subcooling temperature.
Line 8
Line 3
9. Corrected subcooling temperature
Verification Against MC Condenser

Subtract Line 7 (MC condenser subcooling reading from Line 9 (corrected subcooling) to
obtain the Corrected Subcooling temperature.
Line 9
Line 7
10. Difference
 If line 10 (difference value) is less than ±3ºF (±1.67ºC), NO charge adjustment is needed
 If line 10 (difference value) is less than -3ºF (-1.67ºC), ADD additional charge
 If line 10 (difference value) is greater than +3ºF (1.67ºC), the system is overcharged and
charge must be removed
269
Receiver Refrigerant Level

There are two refrigerant level sight glasses installed in each receiver at the air
cooled condenser. The refrigerant level will vary with changes in both the outdoor
ambient temperature and sensed return air temperature at the indoor unit. Check
the refrigerant level after the indoor unit has been operating for at least 15 minutes
and the sensed indoor unit return air temperature is stable and between to the
75ºF to 85ºF (24 - 29ºC).
Sight Glass Levels based on Outdoor Ambient Temperature
 40ºF (4.5ºC) and lower – the Bottom sight glass should be ¾ full
 40ºF (4.5ºC) and higher – the Bottom sight glass should be full
If the indoor return cannot be maintained between 75ºF to 85ºF (24 - 29ºC) due to
lack of load, then the liquid level in the receiver must be adjusted to the following
levels if the return air is between 65ºF to 75ºF (18 - 24ºC).
Sight Glass Levels based on Outdoor Ambient Temperature
 40ºF (4.5ºC) and lower – charge to the bottom of the Top sight glass
 40ºF (4.5ºC) and higher – the Top sight glass should be ¼ full
270
Temperature ºF (ºC) and Pressure PSIG Table

ºF (ºC) R22 R407C ºF (ºC) R22 R407C
0ºF (-17.8ºC) 24.0 18.9 36ºF (2.2ºC) 62.9 56.1
1ºF (-17.2ºC) 24.8 19.6 37ºF (2.8ºC) 64.3 57.5
2ºF (-16.7ºC) 25.7 20. 38ºF (3.3ºC) 65.7 58.9
3ºF (-16.1ºC) 26.5 21.2 39ºF (3.9ºC) 67.1 60.3
4ºF (-15.6ºC) 27.4 22.0 40ºF (4.4ºC) 68.6 61.7
5ºF (-15.0ºC) 28.3 22.8 41ºF (5.0ºC) 70.0 63.1
6ºF (-14.4ºC) 29.1 23.7 42ºF (5.6ºC) 71.5 64.6
7ºF (-13.9ºC) 30.0 24.5 43ºF (6.1ºC) 73.0 66.1
8ºF (-13.3ºC) 31.0 25.4 44ºF (6.7ºC) 74.5 67.6
9ºF (-12.8ºC) 31.9 26.2 45ºF (7.2ºC) 76.1 69.1
10ºF (-12.2ºC) 32.8 27.1 46ºF (7.8ºC) 77.6 70.6
11ºF (-11.7ºC) 33.8 28.0 47ºF (8.3ºC) 79.2 72.2
12ºF (-11.1ºC) 34.8 29.0 48ºF (8.9ºC) 80.8 73.8
13ºF (-10.6ºC) 35.8 29.9 49ºF (9.4ºC) 82.4 75.4
14ºF (-10.0ºC) 36.8 30.9 50ºF (10.0ºC) 84.1 77.1
15ºF (-9.4ºC) 37.8 31.8 55ºF (12.8ºC) 92.6 106.0
16ºF (-8.9ºC) 38.8 32.8 60ºF (15.5ºC) 101.6 116.2
17ºF (-8.3ºC) 39.9 33.8 65ºF (18.3ºC) 111.3 127.0
18ºF (-7.8ºC) 40.9 34.8 70ºF (21.1ºC) 121.5 138.5
19ºF (-7.2ºC) 42.0 35.9 75ºF (23.9ºC) 132.2 150.6
20ºF (-6.7ºC) 43.1 36.9 80ºF (26.7ºC) 143.7 163.5
21ºF (-6.1ºC) 44.2 38.0 85ºF (29.4ºC) 155.7 177.0
22ºF (-5.6ºC) 45.3 39.1 90ºF (32.2ºC) 168.4 191.3
23ºF (-5.0ºC) 45.6 40.2 95ºF (35.0ºC) 181.9 206.4
24ºF (-4.4ºC) 47.6 41.3 100ºF (37.8ºC) 196.0 222.3
25ºF (-3.9ºC) 48.8 42.4 105ºF (40.6ºC) 210.8 239.0
26ºF (-3.3ºC) 50.0 43.6 110ºF (43.3ºC) 226.4 256.5
27ºF (-2.8ºC) 51.2 44.7 115ºF (46.1ºC) 242.8 274.9
28ºF (-2.2ºC) 52.4 45.9 120ºF (48.9ºC) 260.0 294.2
29ºF (-1.7ºC) 53.7 47.1 125ºF (51.7ºC) 278.1 314.5
30ºF (-1.1ºC) 54.9 48.4 130ºF (54.4ºC) 297.0 335.7
31ºF (-0.6ºC) 56.2 49.6 135ºF (57.2ºC) 316.7 357.8
32ºF (0.0ºC) 57.5 50.9 140ºF (60.0ºC) 337.4 380.9
33ºF (0.6ºC) 58.8 52.1 145ºF (62.8ºC) 359.1 405.1
34ºF (1.1ºC) 60.2 53.4 150ºF (65.6ºC) 381.7 430.3
35ºF (1.7ºC) 61.5 54.8 155ºF (68.3ºC) 405.4 456.6
271
Notes
272
How to Use the Schematic

As you look at the outside edge of the electrical schematic (drawing), you will see
the numbers 8 through 1 (reading left to right) across the top and bottom and the
letters D through A (reading from top to bottom) along both the left and right edges
of the schematic. These numbers and letters are called locators, just like on a
map. By intersecting the number and letter into the drawing, you can locate the
section of the schematic you need to reference.
The next area of interest is the line numbers along both sides of the schematic.
By using these line numbers and a straight edge, you can pinpoint a particular
item in the located section. Also, useful is the Nomenclature section along the
right side of the schematic. The drawing nomenclature section identifies the
device by abbreviation and name and indicates on which line the device is found.
If you look deep into the schematic, you can see that the transformer section is
laid out in a ladder progression making it easy to follow-out each circuit. You may
wish to highlight each circuit with a marker making it easy to follow.
The number indicators in the area to the right of the ladder circuit section are also
important. These are the contact locators for each relay or contactor shown on the
drawing. The number represents the line location of the contact(s) for the adjacent
shown relay or contactor. There are two types of line number indicators. One is
highlighted with a bar across the top of the number, this indicates a normally
closed contact. The other number shown without the bar indicates a normally
open contact. Remember that the drawing is shown in the non-powered (de-
energized) state.
These drawings are the latest revisions at publication of this manual and are what
Liebert calls Universal drawings. Liebert has included numerous options on each
one of these drawing to help in troubleshooting the system. These drawings may
or may not be on your particular unit.
It is important to become familiar with legend, nomenclature and notes on each

drawing.
273
Electrical Schematic List

Unit Schematics
182952 DS/VS iCOM Control Board Layout and Plug Assignments
183575 DS/VS iCOM: 8 - 12 Ton, Infrared Humidifier
183579 DS/VS iCOM: 30 Ton, 208 – 230V Scroll Compr., Infrared Humidifier
184147 Challenger3000 iCOM: DX, Steam Canister Humidifier
184149 Challenger3000 iCOM: CW, Infrared Humidifier
184150 Challenger3000 iCOM: DX, Infrared Humidifier
194867 DS/VS iCOM: 8 - 12 Ton, Nortec Humidifier
198229 CW iCOM: Infrared Humidifier
198232 CW iCOM: VSD Fan, Infrared Humidifier
198611 DS/VS iCOM: 8 - 12 Ton, VFD Fan, Infrared Humidifier
302019 DS iCOM: EC Fans Motor, Infrared Humidifier
307623 CW iCOM: EC Fans, Infrared Humidifier
Heat Rejection Schematics

3G-1000 Drycooler Dual Pumps, 3 Ph, 50/60 Hz, 1 – 4 Fans
3G-1001 Drycooler Single Pump, 3 Ph, 50/60 Hz, 1 – 4 Fans
184901 Condenser VFD 3 Ph 60 Hz, 1 – 4 Fans
192773 Condenser Fan Speed Control 3 Ph 60 Hz, 2 – 4 Fans
192776 Condenser Lee-Temp 1 - 4 Fans, 3 Ph 60 Hz
199658 MC Condenser FSC 1 – 4 Fans, 3 Ph 60 Hz
300291 MC Condenser Premium 1 – 4 Fans, 3 Ph 60 Hz
274

Icom Training Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Icom Training Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Large Systems

Precision Cooling Training Manual

Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitations of

Copyright © 2006 by Liebert Corporation

All rights reserved throughout the world.

Printed in the United States of America

Networking Units with Small Displays 74

Chapter 2: Programming Functions 79

Chapter 3: Electrical Connections and Hardware 165

Chapter 4: General Data 192

Chapter 5: MicroChannel Condenser 229

Chapter 6: Miscellaneous Information 251

How To Use The Schematic 273

Electrical Schematic List 274

Temperature and Humidity Control Programs

Cooling and / or Heating Required, in Percent (%)

Temperature Control Programs

2. PI - Proportional + Integral (factory default program)

Proportional (P) Control

Proportional + Integral (PI) Control

Basically, this is done in a three-function process that differs from earlier

Temperature Control Operation

1. Temperature Set Point

 Temperature Set Point plus ½ Temperature Proportional Band = Full Cooling

Cooling / Heating Operation

Both configurations are described in the following pages.

Single Scroll Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

1 Stage Compressor Cooling – No Dead Band

TSP + ½ TPB = Full Cooling

Temperature Set Point 70F

As the air temperature increases, the compressor is activated at 74F which is

Single Scroll Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

1 Stage Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

TSP + TDB + 1/2 TPB = Full Cooling

Temperature Set Point 70F

As the air temperature increases, the compressor is activated at 75F or the

Single Digital Scroll Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

Capacity modulation is achieved by energizing / de-energizing the Digital Scroll

Solenoid Compressor is pumping at 66% capacity

Digital Scroll PWM Cooling Control

Single Digital Scroll PWM Cooling Control

Water / Glycol Units Air Cooled Units

Compressor operates at 50% Compressor operates at 50% capacity

Suction pressure should now be high enough to satisfy the Low

The various configurations are described in the following pages.

2 - Stage Compressor Cooling, No Dead Band

2 Stage Compressor Cooling – No Dead Band

TSP + ½ TPB = Full Cooling

1st Stage - Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

1st stage -Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

Temperature Set Point 70F

2 - Stage Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

2 Stage Compressor Cooling with Dead Band

TSP + TDB +(½ TPB = Full Cooling

1st Stage - Lead 2nd Stage - Lag

Temperature Set Point 70F

4 – Stage Compressor Cooling with Unloaders

4 – Stage Compressor Cooling with Unloaders – No Dead Band

Stage Activation on Temperature Increase

Stage Deactivation on Temperature Decrease

STAGE COMPRESSORS and UNLOADER STATE

Compressor 1 On, Unloader On (energized / open, reduced capacity)

1st Stage ON Set Point + 1.3F = 71.3F